C TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE

B
SECTION
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE AT

E
CONTENTS
INDEX FOR DTC ........................................................ 5 Circuit Diagram ....................................................... 53 F
Alphabetical Index .................................................... 5 Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis .................... 54
DTC No. Index ......................................................... 6 Check Before Engine is Started .............................. 58
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 7 Check at Idle ........................................................... 58 G
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System Cruise Test - Part 1 ................................................. 60
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- Cruise Test - Part 2 ................................................. 61
SIONER” .................................................................. 7 Cruise Test - Part 3 ................................................. 62
H
Precautions for On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Shift Schedule ........................................................ 63
of A/T and Engine .................................................... 7 Symptom Chart ....................................................... 64
Precautions for A/T Assembly or TCM Replacement..... 8 TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values ........... 71
Precautions .............................................................. 9 CONSULT-II Function (TCM) .................................. 74 I
Service Notice or Precautions .................................11 Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT-II ........... 80
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis .................11 DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE .............. 83
PREPARATION ......................................................... 12 Description .............................................................. 83 J
Special Service Tools ............................................. 12 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................... 83
Commercial Service Tools ...................................... 14 Possible Cause ....................................................... 83
A/T FLUID ................................................................. 15 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................. 83
K
Changing A/T Fluid ................................................ 15 Wiring Diagram — AT — CAN ................................ 84
Checking A/T Fluid ................................................. 15 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................. 85
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM .......................................... 16 DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR ......... 86
Cross-Sectional View ............................................. 16 Description .............................................................. 86 L
Shift Mechanism ..................................................... 17 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................... 86
TCM Function ......................................................... 34 Possible Cause ....................................................... 86
Input/Output Signal of TCM .................................... 35 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................. 86 M
CAN Communication .............................................. 35 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................. 87
Line Pressure Control ............................................ 36 DTC P0613 TCM PROCESSOR ............................... 88
Shift Control ........................................................... 36 Description .............................................................. 88
Lock-Up Control ..................................................... 38 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................... 88
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM ............ 40 Possible Cause ....................................................... 88
Introduction ............................................................ 40 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................. 88
OBD-II Function for A/T System ............................. 40 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................. 89
One or Two Trip Detection Logic of OBD-II ............ 40 DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH... 90
OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) ................. 40 Description .............................................................. 90
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ........................... 43 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................... 90
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ............................................ 44 Possible Cause ....................................................... 90
DTC Inspection Priority Chart ................................ 44 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................. 90
Fail-Safe ................................................................. 44 Wiring Diagram — AT — PNP/SW ......................... 91
How To Perform Trouble Diagnosis For Quick and Diagnostic Procedure ............................................. 92
Accurate Repair ..................................................... 47 Component Inspection ............................................ 94
A/T Electrical Parts Location .................................. 52 DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Revision: August 2004 AT-1 2005 Maxima

CIRCUIT .................................................................... 95 Possible Cause ..................................................... 124
Description .............................................................. 95 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 124
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................... 95 Wiring Diagram — AT — 3RDSIG ........................ 126
Possible Cause ....................................................... 95 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 128
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................. 95 DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION ................. 130
Wiring Diagram — AT — FTS ................................. 96 Description ............................................................ 130
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................. 97 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 130
Component Inspection ............................................ 99 Possible Cause ..................................................... 130
DTC P0711 FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR PER- DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 130
FORMANCE ............................................................ 100 Wiring Diagram — AT — 4THSIG ......................... 132
Description ............................................................ 100 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 133
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 100 DTC P0735 A/T 5TH GEAR FUNCTION ................. 135
Possible Cause ..................................................... 100 Description ............................................................ 135
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 100 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 135
Wiring Diagram — AT — FTSP ............................ 101 Possible Cause ..................................................... 135
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 102 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 135
Component Inspection .......................................... 104 Wiring Diagram — AT — 5THSIG ......................... 137
DTC P0717 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR CIR- Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 139
CUIT ........................................................................ 105 DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP) .141
Description ............................................................ 105 Description ............................................................ 141
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 105 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 141
Possible Cause ..................................................... 105 Possible Cause ..................................................... 141
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 105 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 141
Wiring Diagram — AT — TRSC ............................ 106 Wiring Diagram — AT — TCCSIG ........................ 142
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 107 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 143
Component Inspection .......................................... 108 DTC P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID
DTC P0722 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REV- VALVE A (LINE PRESSURE) .................................. 144
OLUTION SENSOR) CIRCUIT ................................ 109 Description ............................................................ 144
Description ............................................................ 109 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 144
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 109 Possible Cause ..................................................... 144
Possible Cause ..................................................... 109 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 144
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 109 Wiring Diagram — AT — PC/A ............................. 145
Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSATC ....................... 110 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 146
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................111 Component Inspection .......................................... 148
Component Inspection .......................................... 112 DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A ............... 149
DTC P0726 ENGINE SPEED INPUT CIRCUIT PER- Description ............................................................ 149
FORMANCE ............................................................ 113 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 149
Description ............................................................ 113 Possible Cause ..................................................... 149
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 113 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 149
Possible Cause ..................................................... 113 Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/A ........................... 150
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 113 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 151
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 113 Component Inspection .......................................... 153
DTC P0731 A/T 1ST GEAR FUNCTION ................. 115 DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B ............... 154
Description ............................................................ 115 Description ............................................................ 154
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 115 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 154
Possible Cause ..................................................... 115 Possible Cause ..................................................... 154
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 115 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 154
Wiring Diagram — AT — 1STSIG ......................... 116 Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/B ........................... 155
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 117 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 156
DTC P0732 A/T 2ND GEAR FUNCTION ................ 118 Component Inspection .......................................... 158
Description ............................................................ 118 DTC P0760 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C ............... 159
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 118 Description ............................................................ 159
Possible Cause ..................................................... 118 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 159
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 118 Possible Cause ..................................................... 159
Wiring Diagram — AT — 2NDSIG ........................ 120 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 159
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 122 Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/C ........................... 160
DTC P0733 A/T 3RD GEAR FUNCTION ................ 124 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 161
Description ............................................................ 124 Component Inspection .......................................... 163
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 124 DTC P0762 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C STUCK ON.164

Revision: August 2004 AT-2 2005 Maxima

 Description ........................................................... 164 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 164 . 198 A
Possible Cause .................................................... 164 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 198
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 164 Possible Cause ..................................................... 198
Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/CS ........................ 165 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 198 B
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 166 Wiring Diagram — AT — MMSW ......................... 199
Component Inspection ......................................... 168 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 201
DTC P0765 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D .............. 169 Component Inspection .......................................... 203
Description ........................................................... 169 Position Indicator .................................................. 203 AT
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 169 DTC P0882 TCM POWER INPUT SIGNAL ............ 204
Possible Cause .................................................... 169 Description ............................................................ 204
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 169 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 204 D
Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/D .......................... 170 Possible Cause ..................................................... 204
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 171 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 204
Component Inspection ......................................... 173 Wiring Diagram — AT — PWR/IN ........................ 205 E
DTC P0770 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E .............. 174 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 207
Description ........................................................... 174 Component Inspection .......................................... 208
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 174 DTC P1726 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL
Possible Cause .................................................... 174 SYSTEM .................................................................. 209 F
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 174 Description ............................................................ 209
Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/E .......................... 175 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS ............ 210
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 176 A/T CHECK Indicator Lamp does not come on .... 210 G
Component Inspection ......................................... 178 Engine Cannot Be Started In “P” or “N” Position . 212
DTC P0775 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID In “P” Position, Vehicle Moves When Pushed ...... 212
VALVE B (SHIFT PRESSURE) ............................... 179 In “N” Position, Vehicle Moves .............................. 213 H
Description ........................................................... 179 Large Shock (“N” to “D” Position) ......................... 214
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 179 Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position. 215
Possible Cause .................................................... 179 Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D” Position . 216
I
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 179 Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1 ..................... 217
Wiring Diagram — AT — PC/B ............................. 180 A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 ................................ 217
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 181 A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3 ................................ 218
Component Inspection ......................................... 183 A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4 ................................ 219 J
DTC P0780 SHIFT .................................................. 184 A/T Does Not Shift: D4 → D5 ................................ 220
Description ........................................................... 184 A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up ............................ 221
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 184 A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition .................. 222 K
Possible Cause .................................................... 184 Lock-up Is Not Released ...................................... 223
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 184 Cannot Be Changed to Manual Mode .................. 224
Wiring Diagram — AT — SFTFNC ....................... 185 A/T Does Not Shift: 5th gear → 4th gear .............. 225 L
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 187 A/T Does Not Shift: 4th gear → 3rd gear .............. 226
DTC P0795 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID A/T Does Not Shift: 3rd gear → 2nd gear ............. 226
VALVE C (TCC AND SHIFT PRESSURE) ............. 188 A/T Does Not Shift: 2nd gear → 1st gear ............. 227
Description ........................................................... 188 Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake .... 228 M
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 188 TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate ................ 229
Possible Cause .................................................... 188 SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM .................................... 231
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 188 Control Device ...................................................... 231
Wiring Diagram — AT — PC/C ............................ 189 Control Cable ........................................................ 232
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 190 A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM .................................... 233
Component Inspection ......................................... 192 Description ............................................................ 233
DTC P0797 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location ......... 233
VALVE C STUCK ON ............................................. 193 Wiring Diagram — AT — SHIFT ........................... 234
Description ........................................................... 193 Shift Lock Control Unit Reference Values ............ 235
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 193 Component Inspection .......................................... 236
Possible Cause .................................................... 193 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE .......................................... 238
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 193 Revolution Sensor Replacement .......................... 238
Wiring Diagram — AT — PC/CS .......................... 194 Turbine Revolution Sensor Replacement ............. 238
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 195 Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment . 238
Component Inspection ......................................... 197 ATF Cooler ........................................................... 239
DTC P0826 MANUAL MODE SWITCH CIRCUIT . 198 ATF Cooler Valve .................................................. 239
Description ........................................................... 198 Control Cable Adjustment ..................................... 240

Revision: August 2004 AT-3 2005 Maxima

 Side cover ............................................................. 241 ASSEMBLY ............................................................. 288
Control Valve Assembly ........................................ 241 Assembly (1) ......................................................... 288
Terminal cord assembly ........................................ 241 Adjustment ............................................................ 295
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY ...................................... 243 Assembly (2) ......................................................... 296
Removal and Installation ...................................... 243 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .... 312
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ......................... 243 General Specifications .......................................... 312
OVERHAUL ............................................................. 245 Shift Schedule ....................................................... 312
Components ......................................................... 245 Stall Speed ............................................................ 313
Locations of Needle Bearings, Bearing Races and Line Pressure ........................................................ 313
Thrust Washers .................................................... 251 Time Lag ............................................................... 313
DISASSEMBLY ....................................................... 252 Shift Solenoid Valves ............................................ 313
Disassembly ......................................................... 252 Solenoid Valves .................................................... 314
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS ...................... 272 Clutch and Brakes ................................................. 314
Oil Pump, 2nd Coast Brake & 2nd Brake ............. 272 Final Drive ............................................................. 315
One-Way Clutch Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor .............................. 316
Coast Brake Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1 ........... 278 Turbine Revolution Sensor .................................... 316
Transaxle Case Cover & B5 Brake ....................... 280 Revolution Sensor ................................................. 316
Differential Gear Assembly ................................... 285

Revision: August 2004 AT-4 2005 Maxima

 INDEX FOR DTC

INDEX FOR DTC PFP:00024

A
Alphabetical Index ECS00A0H

NOTE:
If DTC U1000 is displayed with other DTCs, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000. Refer to B
AT-83 .
DTC
OBD-II Except OBD-II AT
Items
Reference page
(CONSULT-II screen terms) CONSULT-II CONSULT-II
only “TRANSMIS-
GST*1 SION” D
A/T 1ST GR FNCTN P0731 P0731 AT-115
A/T 2ND GR FNCTN P0732 P0732 AT-118
A/T 3RD GR FNCTN P0733 P0733 AT-124
E

A/T 4TH GR FNCTN P0734 P0734 AT-130

A/T 5TH GR FNCTN P0735 P0735 AT-135
F
A/T TCC S/V FNCTN P0744 P0744 AT-141
ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC P0710 P0710 AT-95
CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1000 U1000 AT-83 G
ELEC TH CONTROL — P1726 AT-209
ENG SPD INP PERFOR — P0726 AT-113
H
FLUID TEMP SEN P0711 P0711 AT-100
MANUAL MODE SWITCH — P0826 AT-198
PC SOL A(L/PRESS) P0745 P0745 AT-144 I
PC SOL B(SFT/PRS) P0775 P0775 AT-179
PC SOL C(TCC&SFT) P0795 P0795 AT-188
J
PC SOL C STC ON P0797 P0797 AT-193
PNP SW/CIRC P0705 P0705 AT-90
SHIFT P0780 P0780 AT-184 K
SHIFT SOL A P0750 P0750 AT-149
SHIFT SOL B P0755 P0755 AT-154
L
SHIFT SOL C P0760 P0760 AT-159
SHIFT SOL D P0765 P0765 AT-169
SHIFT SOL E P0770 P0770 AT-174 M
SFT SOL C STUCK ON P0762 P0762 AT-164
TCM POWER INPT SIG P0882 P0882 AT-204
TCM PROCESSOR — P0613 AT-88
TURBINE SENSOR P0717 P0717 AT-105
VEH SPD SE/CIR-MTR — P0500 AT-86
VHCL SPEED SEN-A/T P0722 P0722 AT-109
*1: These numbers are prescribed by SAE J2012.

Revision: August 2004 AT-5 2005 Maxima

 INDEX FOR DTC

DTC No. Index ECS00A0I

NOTE:
If DTC U1000 is displayed with other DTCs, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000. Refer to
AT-83 .
DTC
OBD-II Except OBD-II
Items
Reference page
CONSULT-II CONSULT-II (CONSULT-II screen terms)
only “TRANSMIS-
GST*1 SION”
— P0500 VEH SPD SE/CIR-MTR AT-86
— P0613 TCM PROCESSOR AT-88
P0705 P0705 PNP SW/CIRC AT-90
P0710 P0710 ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC AT-95
P0711 P0711 FLUID TEMP SEN AT-100
P0717 P0717 TURBINE SENSOR AT-105
P0722 P0722 VHCL SPEED SEN-A/T AT-109
— P0726 ENG SPD INP PERFOR AT-113
P0731 P0731 A/T 1ST GR FNCTN AT-115
P0732 P0732 A/T 2ND GR FNCTN AT-118
P0733 P0733 A/T 3RD GR FNCTN AT-124
P0734 P0734 A/T 4TH GR FNCTN AT-130
P0735 P0735 A/T 5TH GR FNCTN AT-135
P0744 P0744 A/T TCC S/V FNCTN AT-141
P0745 P0745 PC SOL A(L/PRESS) AT-144
P0750 P0750 SHIFT SOL A AT-149
P0755 P0755 SHIFT SOL B AT-154
P0760 P0760 SHIFT SOL C AT-159
P0762 P0762 SFT SOL C STUCK ON AT-164
P0765 P0765 SHIFT SOL D AT-169
P0770 P0770 SHIFT SOL E AT-174
P0775 P0775 PC SOL B(SFT/PRS) AT-179
P0780 P0780 SHIFT AT-184
P0795 P0795 PC SOL C(TCC&SFT) AT-188
P0797 P0797 PC SOL C STC ON AT-193
— P0826 MANUAL MODE SWITCH AT-198
P0882 P0882 TCM POWER INPT SIG AT-204
— P1726 ELEC TH CONTROL AT-209
U1000 U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT AT-83
*1: These numbers are prescribed by SAE J2012.

Revision: August 2004 AT-6 2005 Maxima

 PRECAUTIONS

PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001
A
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER” ECS00A0J

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along B
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front AT
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Man-
ual.
WARNING: D
● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be per-
formed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. E
● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to per-
sonal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section. F
● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or
harness connectors.
G
Precautions for On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of A/T and Engine ECS00A0K

The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to warn the
driver of a malfunction causing emission deterioration. H
CAUTION:
● Be sure to turn the ignition switch “OFF” and disconnect the negative battery cable before any
repair or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid valves, I
etc. will cause the MIL to light up.
● Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will
cause the MIL to light up due to an open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease, J
dirt, bent terminals, etc.)
● Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. Interference of the harness with a
bracket, etc. may cause the MIL to light up due to a short circuit. K
● Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube
may cause the MIL to light up due to a malfunction of the EGR system or fuel injection system, etc.
● Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the TCM and L
ECM before returning the vehicle to the customer.

Revision: August 2004 AT-7 2005 Maxima

 PRECAUTIONS

Precautions for A/T Assembly or TCM Replacement ECS00A0L

● When replacing A/T assembly or TCM, refer to the pattern table below and initialize TCM if necessary.
TCM INITIALIZATION PATTERNS
TCM A/T assembly Erasing EEPROM in TCM Remarks
Not replaced
Replaced with Not required because the EEPROM in TCM is in the default
Replaced with Not required
new one state.
new or old one
Replaced with
Not replaced
new or old one
Required because data cannot be conformed to previous
Not replaced Required
Replaced with data written in the EEPROM in TCM.
old one Replaced with
new or old one
NOTE:
“Old one” is the TCM or A/T assembly that has been used on other vehicles.

METHOD FOR TCM INITIALIZATION

1. Perform “CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE”. Refer to AT-75, "CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE"
.
2. Set the vehicle following the items listed below.
● Ignition switch “ON”.

● Selector lever “P” or “N” position.

● Engine not running.

● Vehicle speed is 0 km/h (0 MPH).

● Ignition voltage is more than 10.5V.

● Malfunction was not detected.

3. Touch “WORK SUPPORT”.

4. Touch “INITIALIZATION”.
5. Initialize TCM following the direction in display.

Revision: August 2004 AT-8 2005 Maxima

 PRECAUTIONS

Precautions ECS00A0M

A
● Before connecting or disconnecting the TCM harness con-
nector, turn ignition switch “OFF” and disconnect negative
battery cable. Because battery voltage is applied to TCM
even if ignition switch is turned “OFF”. B

AT

D
SEF289H

● When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or E

from TCM, take care not to damage pin terminals (bend or
break).
Make sure that there are not any bends or breaks on TCM
pin terminal, when connecting pin connectors. F

SEF291H
H

● Before replacing TCM, perform TCM input/output signal

inspection and make sure whether TCM functions properly I
or not. AT-72, "TCM INSPECTION TABLE".

MEF040DA

L
● After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform
“DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code) CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE”. M
The DTC should not be displayed in the “DTC CONFIRMA-
TION PROCEDURE” if the repair is completed.

SEF217U

● Always use the specified brand of A/T fluid. Refer to MA-10, "Fluids and Lubricants" .
● Use paper rags not cloth rags during work.
● After replacing the A/T fluid, dispose of the waste oil using the methods prescribed by law, ordinance, etc.
● Before proceeding with disassembly, thoroughly clean the outside of the transaxle. It is important to pre-
vent the internal parts from becoming contaminated by dirt or other foreign matter.
● Disassembly should be done in a clean work area.

Revision: August 2004 AT-9 2005 Maxima

 PRECAUTIONS

● Use lint-free cloth or towels for wiping parts clean. Common shop rags can leave fibers that could interfere
with the operation of the transaxle.
● Place disassembled parts in order for easier and proper assembly.
● All parts should be carefully cleaned with a general purpose, non-flammable solvent before inspection or
reassembly.
● Gaskets, seals and O-rings should be replaced any time the transaxle is disassembled.
● It is very important to perform functional tests whenever they are indicated.
● The valve body contains precision parts and requires extreme care when parts are removed and serviced.
Place disassembled valve body parts in order for easier and proper assembly. Care will also prevent
springs and small parts from becoming scattered or lost.
● Properly installed valves, sleeves, plugs, etc. will slide along bores in valve body under their own weight.
● Before assembly, apply a coat of recommended ATF to all parts. Apply petroleum jelly to protect O-rings
and seals, or hold bearings and washers in place during assembly. Do not use grease.
● Extreme care should be taken to avoid damage to O-rings, seals and gaskets when assembling.
● After overhaul, refill the transaxle with new ATF.
● When the A/T drain plug is removed, only some of the fluid is drained. Old A/T fluid will remain in torque
converter and ATF cooling system.
Always follow the procedures under “Changing A/T Fluid” in the AT section when changing A/T fluid. Refer
to AT-15, "Changing A/T Fluid" , AT-15, "Checking A/T Fluid" .

Revision: August 2004 AT-10 2005 Maxima

 PRECAUTIONS

Service Notice or Precautions ECS00A0N

ATF COOLER SERVICE A

If A/T fluid contains frictional material (clutches, bands, etc.), or if an A/T is repaired, overhauled, or replaced,
inspect and clean the A/T oil cooler mounted in the radiator or replace the radiator. Flush cooler lines using
cleaning solvent and compressed air after repair. Check Service Bulletins for latest A/T oil cooler cleaning pro- B
cedure. For radiator replacement, refer to CO-12, "RADIATOR" .
OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSIS
● A/T self-diagnosis is performed by the TCM in combination with the ECM. The results can be read through AT
the blinking pattern of the A/T CHECK indicator or the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). Refer to the table
on AT-75, "SELF-DIAG RESULT MODE" for the indicator used to display each self-diagnostic result.
● The self-diagnostic results indicated by the MIL are automatically stored in both the ECM and TCM mem- D
ories.
Always perform the procedure on AT-41, "HOW TO ERASE DTC" to complete the repair and avoid
unnecessary blinking of the MIL. E
● For details of OBD-II, refer to EC-49, "ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM" .
● Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use the new style slide-
locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to PG-61, "HAR- F
NESS CONNECTOR" .
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis ECS00A0O

G
When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following:
● GI-12, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams".
● PG-3, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" for power distribution circuit. H
When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following:
● GI-9, "How to Follow Trouble Diagnoses".
● GI-25, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident". I

Revision: August 2004 AT-11 2005 Maxima

 PREPARATION

PREPARATION PFP:00002

Special Service Tools ECS00A0P

The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.) Description
Tool name
(J34301-C) Measuring line pressure
Oil pressure gauge set
1 (J34301-1)
Oil pressure gauge
2 (J34301-2)
Hoses
3 (J34298)
Adapter
4 (J34282-2)
Adapter
5 (790-301-1230-A) AAT896

60° Adapter
6 (J34301-15)
Square socket
(J45542) Measuring line pressure
Adapter

SCIA3019E

(J45404) Adjusting park/neutral position (PNP) switch

Alignment tool

SCIA3018E

ST33290001 ● Removing oil pump assembly

(J34286) ● Removing thrust roller bearing
Puller
a:250 mm(9.84 in)
b:160 mm(6.30 in)

NT414

ST33400001 Installing differential side oil seals

(J26082)
Drift
a:60 mm(2.36 in) dia.
b:74 mm(1.85 in) dia.

NT086

KV31102400 Removing and installing return springs

(J34285 and J34285-87)
Clutch spring compressor
a:320 mm(12.60 in)
b:174 mm(6.85 in)

NT423

Revision: August 2004 AT-12 2005 Maxima

 PREPARATION

Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.) Description A
Tool name
ST30720000 ● Installing oil seal
(J25405) ● Installing tapered roller bearing B
Drift
a:77 mm(3.03 in) dia.
b:55.5 mm(2.185 in) dia.
AT

NT115

ST30612000 Removing outer race and adjust shim D

(J25742-2)
Drift
a:62 mm(2.44 in) dia.
b:40 mm(1.57 in) dia. E

NT073

ST3127S000 Checking differential side bearing preload

F
(J25765-A)
Preload gauge
1 GG91030000 G
(J25765-A)
Torque wrench
2 HT62940000
( — ) H
Socket adapter
3 HT62900000 NT124

( — )
Socket adapter I
KV40102500
(J28815)
Drift J

K
ZZC0999D

ST33061000 ● Removing tapered roller bearing

(J8107-2) ● Removing manual valve oil seal L
Drift

M
ZZC0628D

KV38100500 Installing tapered roller bearing

( — )
Drift

ZZC0809D

Revision: August 2004 AT-13 2005 Maxima

 PREPARATION

Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.) Description
Tool name
KV40100621 Installing outer race and adjust shim
(J25273)
Drift

ZZC1026D

ST30022000
( — )
Drift

ZZC0255D

Commercial Service Tools ECS00A0Q

Tool name Description

Power tool Loosening bolts and nuts

PBIC0190E

Puller Removing tapered roller bearing

NT077

Puller
a:60 mm(2.36 in) dia.
b:35 mm(1.38 in) dia.

NT411

Revision: August 2004 AT-14 2005 Maxima

 A/T FLUID

A/T FLUID PFP:KLE40

A
Changing A/T Fluid ECS00A0R

Refer to MA-21, "Changing A/T Fluid" .

B
Checking A/T Fluid ECS00A0S

Refer to MA-21, "Checking A/T Fluid" .

AT

Revision: August 2004 AT-15 2005 Maxima

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM PFP:31036

Cross-Sectional View ECS00A0T

SCIA2575E

1. Converter housing 2. 2nd brake 3. One-way clutch No. 2

4. Control valve assembly 5. Side cover 6. 1st and reverse brake
7. Forward clutch 8. Direct clutch 9. Transaxle case cover
10. B5 brake 11. Transaxle case 12. U/D clutch
13. U/D brake 14. Final gear 15. Differential case
16. Output shaft 17. Counter driven gear 18. Counter drive gear
19. Input shaft 20. Oil pump 21. One-way clutch No. 1
22. 2nd coast brake 23. Torque converter 24. Main rear planetary gear
25. Main front planetary gear 26. U/D rear planetary gear 27. U/D front planetary gear

Revision: August 2004 AT-16 2005 Maxima

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

Shift Mechanism ECS00A0U

CONSTRUCTION A

AT

SCIA2576E

1. Forward clutch 2. Direct clutch 3. U/D clutch K

4. 2nd coast brake 5. 2nd brake 6. 1st and reverse brake
7. U/D brake 8. B5 brake 9. One-way clutch No. 1
10. One-way clutch No. 2 11. Main sun gear 12. Main planetary carrier L
13. Main front internal gear 14. Main rear internal gear 15. U/D sun gear
16. U/D front planetary carrier 17. U/D front internal gear 18. U/D rear planetary carrier
19. U/D rear internal gear 20. Input shaft 21. Counter drive gear M
22. Counter driven gear 23. Output shaft 24. Parking gear
25. Parking pawl

Revision: August 2004 AT-17 2005 Maxima

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

FUNCTION OF CLUTCH AND BRAKE

Clutch and brake components Abbr. Function
Forward clutch 1 F/C Connect input shaft 20 to main rear internal gear 10 .
Direct clutch 2 D/C Connect input shaft 20 to main sun gear 11 .
U/D clutch 3 U/D.C Connect U/D sun gear 15 to U/D front planetary carrier 16 .
2nd coast brake 4 2nd C/B Lock main sun gear 11 .
2nd brake 5 2nd/B Lock counterclockwise rotation of main sun gear 11 .
1st and reverse brake 6 1st & R/B Lock main front internal gear 13 .
U/D brake 7 U/D.B Lock U/D sun gear 15 .
B5 brake 8 B5/B Lock U/D rear planetary carrier 18 .
One-way clutch No. 1 9 O.C1 Lock counterclockwise rotation of main sun gear 11 , when 2nd brake 5 oper-
ations.
One-way clutch No. 2 10 O.C2 Lock counterclockwise rotation of main front internal gear 13 .

CLUTCH AND BAND CHART

Clutch Brake One-way clutch

Shift position 2nd C/ 1st & Remarks

F/C D/C U/D.C 2nd/B U/D.B B5/B O.C1 O.C2
B R/B
1 2 3 5 7 8 9 10
4 6
PARK
P
POSITION
REVERSE
R
POSITION
NEUTRAL
N
POSITION

1st

1⇔2

2nd

2⇔3
Automatic shift
D 3rd 1⇔2⇔3⇔
4⇔5
3⇔4

4th

4⇔5

5th

Locks in 5th
M5 5th
gear*
Locks in 4th
M4 4th
gear*
Locks in 3rd
M3 3rd
gear*
Locks in 2nd
M2 2nd
gear*
Locks in 1st
M1 1st
gear*

: Operates
: In transition between applied and released.
*: Except when automated up/down shift control and up/down shift permission control are activated. Refer to AT-37, "MANUAL MODE" .

Revision: August 2004 AT-18 2005 Maxima

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

POWER TRANSMISSION
“N” position A
Since both the forward clutch and the direct clutch are released, torque from the input shaft drive is not trans-
mitted to the output shaft.
B
“P” position
● The same as for the “N” position, both the forward clutch and the direct clutch are released, so torque
from the input shaft drive is not transmitted to the output shaft.
AT
● The parking pole linked with the selector lever meshes with the parking gear and fastens the output shaft
mechanically.
D

M
SCIA2577E

1. Forward clutch 2. Direct clutch 3. U/D clutch

4. 2nd coast brake 5. 2nd brake 6. 1st and reverse brake
7. U/D brake 8. B5 brake 9. One-way clutch No. 1
10. One-way clutch No. 2 11. Main sun gear 12. Main planetary carrier
13. Main front internal gear 14. Main rear internal gear 15. U/D sun gear
16. U/D front planetary carrier 17. U/D front internal gear 18. U/D rear planetary carrier
19. U/D rear internal gear 20. Input shaft 21. Counter drive gear
22. Counter driven gear 23. Output shaft 24. Parking gear
25. Parking pawl

Revision: August 2004 AT-19 2005 Maxima

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

“D” position 1st gear

1. Input shaft rotates clockwise.
2. Forward clutch operates. (Connect input shaft to main rear internal gear.)
3. Main rear internal gear rotates clockwise.
4. Main rear planetary pinion gear rotates itself clockwise.
5. Main front large planetary pinion gear rotates itself clockwise for rear planetary pinion and one.
6. Main front small planetary pinion gear rotates itself counterclockwise.
7. Main front internal gear is going to rotates counterclockwise.
8. One-way clutch No. 2 operates. (Lock counterclockwise rotation of main front internal gear.)
9. Main planetary carrier revolves clockwise due to reaction force of front small planetary pinion gear.
10. Counter drive gear rotates clockwise for main planetary carrier and one.
11. Counter driven gear rotates counterclockwise.
12. U/D front internal gear rotates counterclockwise for counter driven gear and one.
13. U/D front planetary pinion gear rotates itself counterclockwise.
14. U/D sun gear rotates clockwise.
15. U/D rear planetary pinion gear rotates itself counterclockwise.
16. B5 brake operate. (Lock rotation of U/D rear planetary carrier.)
17. U/D rear internal gear rotates counterclockwise.
18. U/D front planetary carrier and output shaft rotates counterclockwise for U/D rear internal gear and one.
19. Final gear clockwise.
● During deceleration, main front internal gear clockwise due to rotation itself clockwise of main front small
planetary pinion gear, but driving force loses due to free of one-way clutch No. 2. Therefore, engine brake
does not operate.

Revision: August 2004 AT-20 2005 Maxima

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

AT

SCIA2585E

1. Forward clutch 2. Direct clutch 3. U/D clutch

4. 2nd coast brake 5. 2nd brake 6. 1st and reverse brake
7. U/D brake 8. B5 brake 9. One-way clutch No. 1
10. One-way clutch No. 2 11. Main sun gear 12. Main planetary carrier
13. Main front internal gear 14. Main rear internal gear 15. U/D sun gear
16. U/D front planetary carrier 17. U/D front internal gear 18. U/D rear planetary carrier
19. U/D rear internal gear 20. Input shaft 21. Counter drive gear
22. Counter driven gear 23. Output shaft 24. Parking gear
25. Parking pawl

Revision: August 2004 AT-21 2005 Maxima

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

“M1” position 1st gear

1. Input shaft rotates clockwise.
2. Forward clutch operates. (Connect input shaft to main rear internal gear.)
3. Main rear internal gear rotates clockwise.
4. Main rear planetary pinion gear rotates itself clockwise.
5. Main front large planetary pinion gear rotates itself clockwise for rear planetary pinion gear and one.
6. Main front small planetary pinion gear rotates itself counterclockwise.
7. Main front internal gear is going to rotates counterclockwise.
8. 1st and reverse brake operates. (Lock rotation of main front internal gear.)
9. Main planetary carrier revolves clockwise due to reaction force of front small planetary pinion gear.
10. Counter drive gear rotates clockwise for main planetary carrier and one.
11. Counter driven gear rotates counterclockwise.
12. U/D front internal gear rotates counterclockwise for counter driven gear and one.
13. U/D front planetary pinion gear rotates itself counterclockwise.
14. U/D sun gear rotates clockwise.
15. U/D rear planetary pinion gear rotates itself counterclockwise.
16. B5 brake operate. (Lock rotation of U/D rear planetary carrier.)
17. U/D rear internal gear rotates counterclockwise.
18. U/D front planetary carrier and output shaft rotates counterclockwise for U/D rear internal gear and one.
19. Final gear clockwise.
● During deceleration, driving force is connected to input shaft directly without one-way clutch. Therefore,
engine brake operates.

Revision: August 2004 AT-22 2005 Maxima

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

AT

SCIA2586E

1. Forward clutch 2. Direct clutch 3. U/D clutch

4. 2nd coast brake 5. 2nd brake 6. 1st and reverse brake
7. U/D brake 8. B5 brake 9. One-way clutch No. 1
10. One-way clutch No. 2 11. Main sun gear 12. Main planetary carrier
13. Main front internal gear 14. Main rear internal gear 15. U/D sun gear
16. U/D front planetary carrier 17. U/D front internal gear 18. U/D rear planetary carrier
19. U/D rear internal gear 20. Input shaft 21. Counter drive gear
22. Counter driven gear 23. Output shaft 24. Parking gear
25. Parking pawl

Revision: August 2004 AT-23 2005 Maxima

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

“D”, “M2” positions 2nd gear

1. Input shaft rotates clockwise.
2. Forward clutch operates. (Connect input shaft to main rear internal gear.)
3. Main rear internal gear rotates clockwise.
4. Main rear planetary pinion gear rotates itself clockwise.
5. Main front large planetary pinion gear rotates itself clockwise for rear planetary pinion and one.
6. 2nd brake and 2nd coast brake operates.
7. One-way clutch No. 1 operates. (Lock rotation of main sun gear.)
8. Main planetary carrier revolves clockwise due to reaction force of front large planetary pinion gear.
9. Counter drive gear rotates clockwise for main planetary carrier and one.
10. Counter driven gear rotates counterclockwise.
11. U/D front internal gear rotates counterclockwise for counter driven gear and one.
12. U/D front planetary pinion gear rotates itself counterclockwise.
13. U/D sun gear rotates clockwise.
14. U/D rear planetary pinion gear rotates itself counterclockwise.
15. B5 brake operate. (Lock rotation of U/D rear planetary carrier.)
16. U/D rear internal gear rotates counterclockwise.
17. U/D front planetary carrier and output shaft rotates counterclockwise for U/D rear internal gear and one.
18. Final gear clockwise.
● During deceleration, driving force is connected to input shaft directly without one-way clutch. Therefore,
engine brake operates.

Revision: August 2004 AT-24 2005 Maxima

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

AT

SCIA2587E

1. Forward clutch 2. Direct clutch 3. U/D clutch

4. 2nd coast brake 5. 2nd brake 6. 1st and reverse brake
7. U/D brake 8. B5 brake 9. One-way clutch No. 1
10. One-way clutch No. 2 11. Main sun gear 12. Main planetary carrier
13. Main front internal gear 14. Main rear internal gear 15. U/D sun gear
16. U/D front planetary carrier 17. U/D front internal gear 18. U/D rear planetary carrier
19. U/D rear internal gear 20. Input shaft 21. Counter drive gear
22. Counter driven gear 23. Output shaft 24. Parking gear
25. Parking pawl

Revision: August 2004 AT-25 2005 Maxima

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

“D”, “M3” positions 3rd gear

1. Input shaft rotates clockwise.
2. Forward clutch operates. (Connect input shaft to main rear internal gear.)
3. Main rear internal gear rotates clockwise.
4. Main rear planetary pinion gear rotates itself clockwise.
5. Main front large planetary pinion gear rotates itself clockwise for rear planetary pinion and one.
6. 2nd brake and 2nd coast brake operates.
7. One-way clutch No. 1 operates. (Lock rotation of main sun gear.)
8. Main planetary carrier revolves clockwise due to reaction force of front large planetary pinion gear.
9. Counter drive gear rotates clockwise for main planetary carrier and one.
10. Counter driven gear rotates counterclockwise.
11. U/D front internal gear rotates counterclockwise for counter driven gear and one.
12. U/D front planetary pinion gear rotates itself counterclockwise.
13. U/D brake operate. (Lock rotation of U/D sun gear.)
14. U/D front planetary carrier revolves counterclockwise due to reaction force of U/D front planetary pinion
gear.
15. U/D rear internal gear and output shaft rotates counterclockwise for U/D front planetary carrier and one.
16. Final gear clockwise.
● During deceleration, driving force is connected to input shaft directly without one-way clutch. Therefore,
engine brake operates.

Revision: August 2004 AT-26 2005 Maxima

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

AT

SCIA2588E

1. Forward clutch 2. Direct clutch 3. U/D clutch

4. 2nd coast brake 5. 2nd brake 6. 1st and reverse brake
7. U/D brake 8. B5 brake 9. One-way clutch No. 1
10. One-way clutch No. 2 11. Main sun gear 12. Main planetary carrier
13. Main front internal gear 14. Main rear internal gear 15. U/D sun gear
16. U/D front planetary carrier 17. U/D front internal gear 18. U/D rear planetary carrier
19. U/D rear internal gear 20. Input shaft 21. Counter drive gear
22. Counter driven gear 23. Output shaft 24. Parking gear
25. Parking pawl

Revision: August 2004 AT-27 2005 Maxima

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

“D”, “M4” positions 4th gear

1. Input shaft rotates clockwise.
2. Forward clutch operates. (Connect input shaft to main rear internal gear.)
3. Main rear internal gear rotates clockwise.
4. Main rear planetary pinion gear rotates itself clockwise.
5. Main front large planetary pinion gear rotates itself clockwise for rear planetary pinion and one.
6. 2nd brake and 2nd coast brake operates.
7. One-way clutch No. 1 operates. (Lock rotation of main sun gear.)
8. Main planetary carrier revolves clockwise due to reaction force of front large planetary pinion gear.
9. Counter drive gear rotates clockwise for main planetary carrier and one.
10. Counter driven gear rotates counterclockwise.
11. U/D front internal gear rotates counterclockwise for counter driven gear and one.
12. U/D clutch operate. (Connect U/D sun gear to U/D front planetary carrier.)
13. U/D front planetary pinion gear cannot rotate itself, and U/D unit rotates counterclockwise as one.
14. Output shaft rotates counterclockwise for U/D unit and one.
15. Final gear clockwise.
● During deceleration, driving force is connected to input shaft directly without one-way clutch. Therefore,
engine brake operates.

Revision: August 2004 AT-28 2005 Maxima

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

AT

SCIA2592E

1. Forward clutch 2. Direct clutch 3. U/D clutch

4. 2nd coast brake 5. 2nd brake 6. 1st and reverse brake
7. U/D brake 8. B5 brake 9. One-way clutch No. 1
10. One-way clutch No. 2 11. Main sun gear 12. Main planetary carrier
13. Main front internal gear 14. Main rear internal gear 15. U/D sun gear
16. U/D front planetary carrier 17. U/D front internal gear 18. U/D rear planetary carrier
19. U/D rear internal gear 20. Input shaft 21. Counter drive gear
22. Counter driven gear 23. Output shaft 24. Parking gear
25. Parking pawl

Revision: August 2004 AT-29 2005 Maxima

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

“D”, “M5” positions 5th gear

1. Input shaft rotates clockwise.
2. Forward clutch operates. (Connect input shaft to main rear internal gear.)
3. Direct clutch operates. (Connect input shaft to main sun gear.)
4. Main rear planetary pinion gear cannot rotate itself, and main rear planetary unit rotates clockwise as one.
5. Main front large planetary pinion gear cannot rotate itself for main rear planetary pinion gear and one, and
main front planetary unit rotates clockwise as one.
6. Counter drive gear rotates clockwise for main front planetary unit and one.
7. Counter driven gear rotates counterclockwise.
8. U/D front internal gear rotates counterclockwise for counter driven gear and one.
9. U/D clutch operate. (Connect U/D sun gear to U/D front planetary carrier.)
10. U/D front planetary pinion gear cannot rotate itself, and U/D unit rotates counterclockwise as one.
11. Output shaft rotates counterclockwise for U/D unit and one.
12. Final gear clockwise.
● During deceleration, driving force is connected to input shaft directly without one-way clutch. Therefore,
engine brake operates.

Revision: August 2004 AT-30 2005 Maxima

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

AT

SCIA2593E

1. Forward clutch 2. Direct clutch 3. U/D clutch

4. 2nd coast brake 5. 2nd brake 6. 1st and reverse brake
7. U/D brake 8. B5 brake 9. One-way clutch No. 1
10. One-way clutch No. 2 11. Main sun gear 12. Main planetary carrier
13. Main front internal gear 14. Main rear internal gear 15. U/D sun gear
16. U/D front planetary carrier 17. U/D front internal gear 18. U/D rear planetary carrier
19. U/D rear internal gear 20. Input shaft 21. Counter drive gear
22. Counter driven gear 23. Output shaft 24. Parking gear
25. Parking pawl

Revision: August 2004 AT-31 2005 Maxima

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

“R” position
1. Input shaft rotates clockwise.
2. Direct clutch operates. (Connect input shaft to main sun gear.)
3. Main sun gear rotates clockwise.
4. Main rear planetary pinion gear rotates itself clockwise.
5. Main front large planetary pinion gear rotates itself counterclockwise for rear planetary pinion gear and
one.
6. Main front small planetary pinion gear rotates itself clockwise.
7. 1st and reverse brake operates. (Lock rotation of main front internal gear.)
8. Main planetary carrier revolves counterclockwise due to reaction force of front small planetary pinion gear.
9. Counter drive gear rotates counterclockwise for main planetary carrier and one.
10. Counter driven gear rotates clockwise.
11. U/D front internal gear rotates clockwise for counter driven gear and one.
12. U/D front planetary pinion gear rotates itself clockwise.
13. U/D sun gear rotates counterclockwise.
14. U/D rear planetary pinion gear rotates itself clockwise.
15. B5 brake operate. (Lock rotation of U/D rear planetary carrier.)
16. U/D rear internal gear rotates clockwise.
17. U/D front planetary carrier and output shaft rotates clockwise for U/D rear internal gear and one.
18. Final gear counterclockwise.
● During deceleration, driving force is connected to input shaft directly without one-way clutch. Therefore,
engine brake operates.

Revision: August 2004 AT-32 2005 Maxima

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

AT

SCIA2594E

1. Forward clutch 2. Direct clutch 3. U/D clutch

4. 2nd coast brake 5. 2nd brake 6. 1st and reverse brake
7. U/D brake 8. B5 brake 9. One-way clutch No. 1
10. One-way clutch No. 2 11. Main sun gear 12. Main planetary carrier
13. Main front internal gear 14. Main rear internal gear 15. U/D sun gear
16. U/D front planetary carrier 17. U/D front internal gear 18. U/D rear planetary carrier
19. U/D rear internal gear 20. Input shaft 21. Counter drive gear
22. Counter driven gear 23. Output shaft 24. Parking gear
25. Parking pawl

Revision: August 2004 AT-33 2005 Maxima

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

TCM Function ECS00A0V

The function of the TCM is to:

● Receive input signals sent from various switches and sensors.
● Determine required line pressure, shifting point, lock-up operation, and engine brake operation.
● Send required output signals to the respective solenoids.
CONTROL SYSTEM OUTLINE
The automatic transaxle senses vehicle operating conditions through various sensors or signals. It always
controls the optimum shift position and reduces shifting and lock-up shocks.
SENSORS (or SIGNAL) TCM ACTUATORS
PNP switch
Shift control
Throttle angle signal Shift solenoid valve A
Line pressure control
Throttle position signal Shift solenoid valve B
Lock-up control
Engine speed signal Shift solenoid valve C
Engine brake control
Engine torque signal Þ Þ Shift solenoid valve D
Timing control
A/T fluid temperature sensor Shift solenoid valve E
Fail-safe control
Revolution sensor Pressure control solenoid valve A
Self-diagnosis
Turbine revolution sensor Pressure control solenoid valve B
CONSULT-II communication line
Vehicle speed signal Pressure control solenoid valve C
CAN communication line
Manual mode switch signal A/T CHECK indicator lamp
On board diagnosis
Stop lamp switch signal

CONTROL SYSTEM DIAGRAM

WCIA0445E

Revision: August 2004 AT-34 2005 Maxima

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

Input/Output Signal of TCM ECS00A0W

A
Line Vehicle Engine Fail-safe Self-diag-
Shift Lock-up
Control item pressure speed brake function nostics
control control
control control control (*3) function
B
Throttle angle signal(*5) X X X X X X X

Throttle position signal(*5) X(*2) X(*2) X X(*2) X(*4)

Revolution sensor X X X X X X X AT
Turbine revolution sensor X X X X X X
(*1) (*5) X X X X X X
Vehicle speed signal MTR
D
Engine speed signals(*5) X X X X X

Engine torque signals(*5) X X X X X X

Input E
PNP switch X X X X X X X(*4)
Manual mode switch X X X X X

Stop lamp switch signal(*5) X X X X(*4) F

A/T fluid temperature sensor X X X X X X

Operation signal(*5) X X X
ASCD G
Overdrive cancel signal(*5) X X X
TCM power supply voltage signal X X X X X X X
Shift solenoid valve A/B/C/D/E X X X X
H

Pressure control solenoid valve A X X X X X X X

Out- Pressure control solenoid valve B X X X X X
put I
Pressure control solenoid valve C X X X X

Self-diagnostics table(*5) X
*1: Spare for revolution sensor
J
*2: Spare for throttle angle signal
*3: If these input and output signals are different, the TCM triggers the fail-safe function.
*4: Used as a condition for starting self-diagnostics; if self-diagnostics are not started, it is judged that there is some kind of error. K
*5: CAN communications.

CAN Communication ECS00A0X

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION L
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul-
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many elec-
tronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other M
control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.
Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
For details, refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .

Revision: August 2004 AT-35 2005 Maxima

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

Line Pressure Control ECS00A0Y

● The pressure control solenoid valve A controls linear line pressure by control signal from TCM and line
pressure for clutches and brakes to reduce shift shock.
● This pressure control solenoid valve A controls the pressure regulator valve as the signal pressure and
adjusts the pressure of the operating oil discharged from the oil pump to the line pressure most appropri-
ate to the driving state.

SCIA2605E

LINE PRESSURE CONTROL IS BASED ON THE TCM LINE PRESSURE CHARACTERISTIC

PATTERN
In order to obtain the most appropriate line pressure characteristic to meet the current driving state, the TCM
controls the pressure control solenoid valve A current and thus controls the line pressure.
Shift Control ECS00A0Z

The clutch pressure control solenoid is controlled by the signals from the switches and sensors. Thus, the
clutch pressure is adjusted to be appropriate to the engine load state and vehicle driving state. It becomes
possible to finely control the clutch hydraulic pressure with high precision and a smoother shift change charac-
teristic is attained.

SCIA2610E

Basically TCM programmed for economy mode, but TCM changes to several shift schedule automatically
according to specified condition.

Revision: August 2004 AT-36 2005 Maxima

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

SPECIAL SHIFT MODE

Upslope Mode A
When TCM detects upslope from load of engine torque and decrease of acceleration, this mode changes shift
points in high-speed side according to the upslope degree and avoids busy shift of A/T.
B
Downslope Mode
When TCM detects downslope from increase of acceleration with accelerator full close, this mode operates
moderate engine brake by changing shift points in high-speed side.
AT
Hot Mode Control
This control lowers ATF temperature by changing shift points when the temperature is extremely high.
MANUAL MODE D
Driver oneself can select favorite gear and enjoy sports driving of manual transmission sense by shifting lever
from D position to manual mode position and + (up shift) / - (down shift). But lock-up control is operated auto-
matically. Shift control is operated again by shifting from manual gear position to D position. Following control E
is operated when manual mode.
Automated Up Shift Control
F
In order to avoid the over speed of the engine, up shift operate automatically, if it becomes over a constant
vehicle speed.
Automated Down Shift Control G
In order to avoid the stall of the engine, down shift operate automatically, if it becomes under a constant vehi-
cle speed.
Up Shift Permission Control H
In order to avoid the stall of the engine, up shift is done only at over a constant vehicle speed.
Down Shift Permission Control I
In order to avoid the over speed of the engine, down shift is done only at under a constant vehicle speed.
UP/DOWN SHIFT LEARNING CONTROL
This control learns the pressure to each clutch or brake in order to reduce shifting shock at each shifting (Up, J
Down, Manual down, Coast down).
N-D SHIFT CONTROL
K
This control improves the N-D shift quality due to controlling line pressure solenoid valve according to forward
clutch piston stroke learned in N-D shift learning control and applying best hydraulic pressure to forward clutch
at N-D shift.
L
N-D SHIFT LEARNING CONTROL
This control learns the forward clutch hydraulic pressure due to monitoring a forward clutch engaging time and
a rotation change rate.
M
N-R SHIFT CONTROL
This control improves the N-R shift quality due to controlling shift pressure solenoid valve according to direct
clutch piston stroke learned in N-R shift learning control and applying best hydraulic pressure to direct clutch
at N-R shift.
N-R SHIFT LEARNING CONTROL
This control learns the direct clutch hydraulic pressure due to monitoring a direct clutch engaging time and a
rotation change rate.
TORQUE REDUCTION CONTROL
This control improves the shift quality due to sending torque reduction request signal from TCM to ECM and
cutting engine torque increase of shift at N-D shift, N-R shift and 1 ⇔ 2 ⇔ 3 ⇔ 4 ⇔ 5.
If accelerator pedal is depressed rapidly, this control establishes the upper limit value of engine torque and
avoids engine flare at 2 ⇔ 3, 3 ⇔ 4 and 4 Þ 2 of clutch to clutch shift.

Revision: August 2004 AT-37 2005 Maxima

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

Lock-Up Control ECS00A10

The torque converter clutch piston in the torque converter is engaged to eliminate torque converter slip to
increase power transmission efficiency.
The torque converter clutch control valve operation is controlled by the pressure control solenoid valve C,
which is controlled by a signal from TCM, and the torque converter clutch control valve engages or releases
the torque converter clutch piston.
Lock-up Operation Condition Table
Selector lever D position M5 position M4 position M3 position
Gear position 5 4 5 4 3
Lock-up × – × × ×
Slip lock-up × × – – –

TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH CONTROL VALVE CONTROL

Lock-up Control System Diagram

SCIA2612E

Lock-up Released
● In the lock-up released state, the torque converter clutch control valve is set into the unlocked state by the
pressure control solenoid valve C and the lock-up apply pressure is drained.
In this way, the torque converter clutch piston is not coupled.
Lock-up Applied
● In the lock-up applied state, the torque converter clutch control valve is set into the locked state by the
pressure control solenoid valve C and lock-up apply pressure is generated.
In this way, the torque converter clutch piston is pressed and coupled.

Revision: August 2004 AT-38 2005 Maxima

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

SMOOTH LOCK-UP CONTROL

When shifting from the lock-up released state to the lock-up applied state, the current output to the pressure A
control solenoid valve C is controlled with the TCM. In this way, when shifting to the lock-up applied state, the
torque converter clutch is temporarily set to the half-clutched state to reduce the shock.
Half-Clutched State B
● The current output from the TCM to the pressure control solenoid valve C is varied to steadily increase the
pressure control solenoid valve C pressure.
In this way, the lock-up apply pressure gradually rises and while the torque converter clutch piston is put AT
into half-clutched status, the torque converter clutch piston operating pressure is increased and the cou-
pling is completed smoothly.
Slip Lock-up Control D
● In the slip region, the pressure control solenoid valve C current is controlled with the TCM to put it into the
half-clutched state. This absorbs the engine torque fluctuation and lock-up operates from low speed.
This raises the fuel efficiency for 4th and 5th gears at both low speed and when the accelerator has a low E
degree of opening.

Revision: August 2004 AT-39 2005 Maxima

 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM PFP:00028

Introduction ECS00A11

The A/T system has two self-diagnostic systems.

The first is the emission-related on board diagnostic system (OBD-II) performed by the TCM in combination
with the ECM. The malfunction is indicated by the MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) and is stored as a DTC in
the ECM memory but not the TCM memory.
The second is the TCM original self-diagnosis indicated by the A/T CHECK indicator lamp. The malfunction is
stored in the TCM memory. The detected items are overlapped with OBD-II self-diagnostic items. For detail,
refer to AT-75, "SELF-DIAG RESULT MODE" .
OBD-II Function for A/T System ECS00A12

The ECM provides emission-related on board diagnostic (OBD-II) functions for the A/T system. One function
is to receive a signal from the TCM used with OBD-related parts of the A/T system. The signal is sent to the
ECM when a malfunction occurs in the corresponding OBD-related part. The other function is to indicate a
diagnostic result by means of the MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) on the instrument panel. Sensors, switches
and solenoid valves are used as sensing elements.
The MIL automatically illuminates in One or Two Trip Detection Logic when a malfunction is sensed in relation
to A/T system parts.
One or Two Trip Detection Logic of OBD-II ECS00A13

ONE TRIP DETECTION LOGIC

If a malfunction is sensed during the first test drive, the MIL will illuminate and the malfunction will be stored in
the ECM memory as a DTC. The TCM is not provided with such a memory function.
TWO TRIP DETECTION LOGIC
When a malfunction is sensed during the first test drive, it is stored in the ECM memory as a 1st trip DTC
(diagnostic trouble code) or 1st trip freeze frame data. At this point, the MIL will not illuminate. — 1st Trip
If the same malfunction as that experienced during the first test drive is sensed during the second test drive,
the MIL will illuminate. — 2nd Trip
The “trip” in the “One or Two Trip Detection Logic” means a driving mode in which self-diagnosis is performed
during vehicle operation.
OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) ECS00A14

HOW TO READ DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC

DTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods.
( with CONSULT-II or GST) CONSULT-II or GST (Generic Scan Tool) Examples: P0705, P0710 etc.
These DTC are prescribed by SAE J2012.
(CONSULT-II also displays the malfunctioning component or system.)
● 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
● Output of the diagnostic trouble code indicates that the indicated circuit has a malfunction. How-
ever, in case of the Mode II and GST, they do not indicate whether the malfunction is still occurring
or occurred in the past and returned to normal.
CONSULT-II can identify them as shown below, therefore, CONSULT-II (if available) is recom-
mended.
A sample of CONSULT-II display for DTC and 1st trip DTC is shown
on the next page. DTC or 1st trip DTC of a malfunction is displayed
in SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS mode for “ENGINE” with CON-
SULT-II. Time data indicates how many times the vehicle was driven
after the last detection of a DTC.

BCIA0030E

Revision: August 2004 AT-40 2005 Maxima

 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM

If the DTC is being detected currently, the time data will be “0”.
A

AT

SAT015K

D
If a 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM, the time data will be “1t”.

G
SAT016K

Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data H

The ECM has a memory function, which stores the driving condition such as fuel system status, calculated
load value, engine coolant temperature, short term fuel trim, long term fuel trim, engine speed and vehicle
speed at the moment the ECM detects a malfunction.
Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data, I
and the data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT-II
or GST. The 1st trip freeze frame data can only be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, not on the GST. For
detail, refer to EC-54, "FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA" . J
Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data) can be stored in the
ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no priority
for 1st trip freeze frame data and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once
K
freeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MIL on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no
longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM. The ECM has the fol-
lowing priorities to update the data.
L
Priority Items
Misfire — DTC: P0300 - P0306
1
Freeze frame data Fuel Injection System Function — DTC: P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175
M
2 Except the above items (Includes A/T related items)
3 1st trip freeze frame data

Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTC) are cleared when the ECM mem-
ory is erased.
HOW TO ERASE DTC
The diagnostic trouble code can be erased by CONSULT-II, GST or ECM DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE as
described following.
● If the battery cable is disconnected, the diagnostic trouble code will be lost within 24 hours.
● When you erase the DTC, using CONSULT-II or GST is easier and quicker than switching the mode
selector on the ECM.
The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared from the ECM memory when erasing DTC
related to OBD-II. For details, refer to EC-50, "EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION ITEMS" .
● Diagnostic trouble codes (DTC)
● 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes (1st trip DTC)
● Freeze frame data
Revision: August 2004 AT-41 2005 Maxima
 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM

● 1st trip freeze frame data

● System readiness test (SRT) codes
● Test values
HOW TO ERASE DTC (WITH CONSULT-II)
● If a DTC is displayed for both ECM and TCM, it is necessary to be erased for both ECM and TCM.
1. If the ignition switch stays “ON” after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch “OFF” once. Wait at least
10 seconds and then turn it “ON” (engine stopped) again.
2. Turn CONSULT-II “ON” and touch “A/T”.
3. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
4. Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the TCM will be erased.) Then touch “BACK” twice.
5. Touch “ENGINE”.
6. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
7. Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the ECM will be erased.)

WCIA0405E

HOW TO ERASE DTC (WITH GST)

1. If the ignition switch stays “ON” after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch “OFF” once. Wait at least
10 seconds and then turn it “ON” (engine stopped) again.
2. Erase DTC with TCM. Refer to AT-82, "Erase self-diagnosis" . (The engine warm-up step can be skipped
when performing the diagnosis only to erase the DTC.)
3. Select Mode 4 with Generic Scan Tool (GST). For details, refer to EC-143, "Generic Scan Tool (GST)
Function" .
HOW TO ERASE DTC (NO TOOLS)
The A/T CHECK indicator lamp is located on the instrument panel.

Revision: August 2004 AT-42 2005 Maxima

 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM

1. If the ignition switch stays “ON” after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch “OFF” once. Wait at least
10 seconds and then turn it “ON” (engine stopped) again. A
2. Erase DTC with TCM. Refer to AT-82, "Erase self-diagnosis" . (The engine warm-up step can be skipped
when performing the diagnosis only to erase the DTC.)
3. Erase DTC with ECM. Refer to EC-62, "How to Erase DTC" . B
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ECS00A15

DESCRIPTION
AT
The MIL is located on the instrument panel.
1. The MIL will light up when the ignition switch is turned “ON” with-
out the engine running. This is a bulb check.
D
● If the MIL does not light up, refer to DI-41, "WARNING LAMPS" ,
or see EC-64, "Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)" .
2. When the engine is started, the MIL should go off.
If the MIL remains on, the on board diagnostic system has E
detected an engine system malfunction.

F
SEF217U

Revision: August 2004 AT-43 2005 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PFP:00004

DTC Inspection Priority Chart ECS00A16

If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following priority
chart.
NOTE:
If DTC U1000 is displayed with other DTCs, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000. Refer to
AT-83 .
Priority Detected items (DTC)
1 U1000 CAN communication line
2 Except above

Fail-Safe ECS00A17

The TCM has an electrical fail-safe mode. This mode makes it possible to operate even if there is a malfunc-
tion in a main electronic control input/output signal circuit.
In fail-safe mode, a driving condition is selected according to the malfunctioning location, and line pressure is
set at the maximum. For this reason, the customer will be subjected to uncomfortable “slipping” or “poor accel-
eration” of the vehicle.
In that case, handle according to the “diagnostics flow” (Refer to AT-48 ).
FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION
If any malfunction occurs in a sensor or solenoid, this function controls the A/T to make driving possible.
NOTE:
Line pressure is set at the maximum in fail-safe mode. Although gear position differs depending on
the type of fail-safe modes, CONSULT-II indicates “5th”.
DTC Malfunction items Fail-safe*
P0500 Vehicle speed signal No learning control.
P0613 TCM processor Fail-safe mode 4
P0705 PNP switch Fail-safe mode 4
Sets ATF temperature data at 111°C (232°F) after 15 minutes. Inhibits
P0710 ATF temperature sensor circuit
lock-up control.
Sets ATF temperature data at 111°C (232°F) after 15 minutes. Inhibits
P0711 ATF temperature sensor function
lock-up control.
P0717 Turbine revolution sensor Fail-safe mode 1
Uses vehicle speed signal from combination meter as a substitute. Inhib-
P0722 Revolution sensor
its learning control.
Engine speed signal input circuit perfor-
P0726 Fail-safe mode 1
mance
P0731 1st gear function No 1st gear, no control for N-D shift.
Fail-safe mode 1. Also, ECM restricts engine torque to prevent clutch
P0732 2nd gear function
slipping.
Fail-safe mode 1. Also, ECM restricts engine torque to prevent clutch
P0733 3rd gear function
slipping.
Fail-safe mode 1. Also, ECM restricts engine torque to prevent clutch
P0734 4th gear function
slipping.
Fail-safe mode 1. Also, ECM restricts engine torque to prevent clutch
P0735 5th gear function
slipping.
P0744 Lock-up function Fail-safe mode 1
Fail-safe mode 1. Also, ECM restricts engine torque to prevent clutch
P0745 Pressure control solenoid valve A
slipping.

Revision: August 2004 AT-44 2005 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

DTC Malfunction items Fail-safe*

A
Any one of fail-safe modes
● Fail-safe mode 1
P0750 Shift solenoid valve A
● Fail-safe mode 7. Also, ECM restricts input torque to prevent clutch
slipping. B
Any one of fail-safe modes
P0755 Shift solenoid valve B ● Fail-safe mode 1
AT
● Fail-safe mode 8
Any one of fail-safe modes
● Fail-safe mode 2
P0760 Shift solenoid valve C D
● Fail-safe mode 5
● Fail-safe mode 9
Fail-safe mode 2. Also, ECM restricts engine torque to prevent clutch E
P0762 Shift solenoid valve C stuck ON
slipping.
Any one of fail-safe modes
● Fail-safe mode 1 F
P0765 Shift solenoid valve D
● Fail-safe mode 10. Also, ECM restricts input torque to prevent clutch
slipping.
Any one of fail-safe modes G
● Fail-safe mode 1. Also, ECM restricts engine torque to prevent clutch
P0770 Shift solenoid valve E slipping.
● Fail-safe mode 6. Also, ECM restricts engine torque to prevent clutch
H
slipping.
P0775 Pressure control solenoid valve B Fail-safe mode 3
Fail-safe mode 1. Also, ECM restricts input torque to prevent clutch slip- I
P0780 Shift function
ping.
P0795 Pressure control solenoid valve C Fail-safe mode 1
P0797 Pressure control solenoid valve C stuck ON Fail-safe mode 1 J
P0826 Manual mode switch No manual mode control.
P0882 TCM power input signal Fail-safe mode 1
K
● The accelerator opening angle is controlled by ECM according to a
P1726 Electric throttle control pre-determined accelerator angle to make driving possible.
● No lock-up, no learning control.
L
Any one of fail-safe modes
● Fail-safe mode 1
● Fail-safe mode 1. Also, ECM restricts engine torque to prevent clutch
U1000 CAN communication circuit M
slipping.
● No learning control.
● No lock-up, no learning control, no special shift mode control.
*: For fail-safe modes 1 to 10, refer to AT-45, "Fail-safe mode list" .

Fail-safe mode list

Pressure control sole-
Gear Shift solenoid valve
Fail-safe mode Selector lever noid valve
position*1
A B C D E A B C
D position
4th OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
Manual mode: + (up shift)
Fail-safe mode 1
Manual mode: - (down shift) 2nd OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
R position Reverse OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF

Revision: August 2004 AT-45 2005 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Pressure control sole-

Gear Shift solenoid valve
Fail-safe mode Selector lever noid valve
position*1
A B C D E A B C
D position
3rd OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
Fail-safe mode 2 Manual mode: + (up shift)
(CONSULT-II dis-
plays “8”) Manual mode: - (down shift) 2nd OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
R position Reverse OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
D position
4th OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
Manual mode: + (up shift)
Fail-safe mode 3
Manual mode: - (down shift) 2nd OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
R position Reverse OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
D position
4th OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
Manual mode: + (up shift)
Fail-safe mode 4
Manual mode: - (down shift) 4th OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
R position Reverse OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
D position
4th OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
Manual mode: + (up shift)
Fail-safe mode 5
Manual mode: - (down shift) 4th OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
R position Reverse OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
D position
4th OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
Manual mode: + (up shift)
Fail-safe mode 6
Manual mode: - (down shift) 2nd OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
R position Reverse OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
D position
4th ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
Manual mode: + (up shift)
Fail-safe mode 7
Manual mode: - (down shift) 2nd ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
R position *2 ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
Reverse
D position
5th OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
Fail-safe mode 8 Manual mode: + (up shift)
(CONSULT-II dis-
plays “1”) Manual mode: - (down shift) (2nd)*3 OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
R position Reverse OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
D position
4th OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
Fail-safe mode 9 Manual mode: + (up shift)
(CONSULT-II dis-
plays “8”) Manual mode: - (down shift) 4th OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
R position Reverse OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
D position
4th OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
Fail-safe mode 10 Manual mode: + (up shift)
(CONSULT-II dis-
plays “6”) Manual mode: - (down shift) 3rd OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
R position Reverse*2 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
*1: CONSULT-II indicates “5th”.
*2: Reverse gear ratio difference (Gear ratio: 3.342)
*3: 3rd gear ratio difference (Gear ratio: 2.301)

Revision: August 2004 AT-46 2005 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

How To Perform Trouble Diagnosis For Quick and Accurate Repair ECS00A18

INTRODUCTION A
The TCM receives a signal from the vehicle speed signal, throttle position sensor (accelerator pedal position
sensor) or PNP switch and provides shift control or lock-up control via A/T solenoid valves.
The TCM also communicates with the ECM by means of a signal B
sent from sensing elements used with the OBD-related parts of the
A/T system for malfunction-diagnostic purposes. The TCM is capa-
ble of diagnosing malfunctioning parts while the ECM can store mal-
AT
functions in its memory.
Input and output signals must always be correct and stable in the
operation of the A/T system. The A/T system must be in good oper-
ating condition and be free of valve seizure, solenoid valve malfunc- D
tion, etc.

SAT631IB E

It is much more difficult to diagnose an error that occurs intermit-

tently rather than continuously. Most intermittent errors are caused F
by poor electric connections or improper wiring. In this case, careful
checking of suspected circuits may help prevent the replacement of
good parts.
G
A visual check only may not find the cause of the errors. A road test
with CONSULT-II (or GST) or a circuit tester connected should be
performed. Follow the AT-48, "WORK FLOW" .
H

SAT632I

I
Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with a
customer who approaches with a driveability complaint. The cus-
tomer can supply good information about such errors, especially J
intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and under
what conditions they occur. A “Diagnostic Worksheet” as shown on
the example (Refer to AT-49 ) should be used.
K
Start your diagnosis by looking for “conventional” errors first. This will
help troubleshoot driveability errors on an electronically controlled
engine vehicle.
Also check related Service bulletins. L
SEF234G

Revision: August 2004 AT-47 2005 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

WORK FLOW
A good understanding of the malfunction conditions can make troubleshooting faster and more accurate.
In general, each customer feels differently about a malfunction. It is important to fully understand the symp-
toms or conditions for a customer complaint.
Make good use of the two sheets provided, “Information From Customer” (Refer to AT-49 ) and “Diagnostic
Worksheet” (Refer to AT-49 ), to perform the best troubleshooting possible.
Work Flow Chart

SCIA0501E

*1. AT-49 *2. AT-49 *3. AT-44

*4. AT-54 *5. AT-54, AT-56 *6. AT-57
*7. AT-74 *8. AT-40 *9. AT-43
*10. AT-83 *11. AT-209 *12. AT-210
*13. AT-229 *14. AT-64 *15. AT-41
*16. AT-83 *17. AT-209 *18. EC-50

Revision: August 2004 AT-48 2005 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET
Information From Customer A
KEY POINTS
● WHAT..... Vehicle & A/T model
B
● WHEN..... Date, Frequencies
● WHERE..... Road conditions
● HOW..... Operating conditions, Symptoms AT
Customer name MR/MS Model & Year VIN
Trans. Model Engine Mileage
D
Incident Date Manuf. Date In Service Date
Frequency ❏ Continuous ❏ Intermittent (times a day)
Symptoms ❏ Vehicle does not move. (❏ Any position ❏ Particular position) E
❏ No up-shift (❏ 1st → 2nd ❏ 2nd → 3rd ❏ 3rd → 4th ❏ 4th → 5th)
❏ No down-shift (❏ 5th → 4th ❏ 4th → 3rd ❏ 3rd → 2nd ❏ 2nd → 1st)
❏ Lock-up malfunction F
❏ Shift point too high or too low.
❏ Shift shock or slip (❏ N → D ❏ Lock-up ❏ Any drive position)
G
❏ Noise or vibration
❏ No kick down
❏ No pattern select H
❏ Others
( )
Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) ❏ Continuously lit ❏ Not lit I
A/T Check indicator lamp ❏ Continuously lit ❏ Not lit

Diagnostic Worksheet Chart J

1 ❏ Read the item on cautions concerning fail-safe and understand the customer's complaint. AT-44
❏ A/T fluid inspection
K
2 ❏ Leak (Repair leak location.) AT-54
❏ State
❏ Amount
❏ Stall test, time lag test and line pressure test
L

❏ Stall test
❏ Engine ❏ B5 brake
M
❏ Torque converter one-way clutch ❏ One-way clutch No. 2
❏ Line pressure is low ❏ Oil pump
❏ Forward clutch ❏ Oil strainer
❏ Direct clutch ❏ Oil leak for each range circuit AT-54, AT-
3 ❏ 1st and reverse brake 56
❏ Time lag test
❏ Line pressure is low ❏ Oil pump
❏ Forward clutch ❏ Oil strainer
❏ Direct clutch ❏ Oil leak for “D” position circuit
❏ 1st and reverse brake ❏ Oil leak for “R” position circuit
❏ One-way clutch No. 2
❏ Line pressure inspection - Suspected part:

Revision: August 2004 AT-49 2005 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

❏ Perform all road tests and enter checks in required inspection items. AT-57
Check before engine is started
❏ The A/T CHECK Indicator Lamp does come on. AT-210 . AT-58
❏ Perform self-diagnostics. Enter checks for detected items.
❏ Vehicle speed sensor·MTR. AT-86 .
❏ TCM processor. AT-88 .
❏ PNP switch. AT-90 .
❏ A/T fluid temperature sensor circuit. AT-95 .
❏ A/T fluid temperature sensor performance. AT-100 .
❏ Turbine revolution sensor circuit. AT-105 .
❏ Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor) circuit. AT-109 .
❏ Engine speed input circuit performance. AT-113 .
❏ 1st gear function. AT-115 .
❏ 2nd gear function. AT-118 .
❏ 3rd gear function. AT-124 .
❏ 4th gear function. AT-130 .
❏ 5th gear function. AT-135 .
4-1. ❏ Lock-up function. AT-141 .
❏ Shift function. AT-184 .
❏ Pressure control solenoid valve A. AT-144 .
❏ Pressure control solenoid valve B. AT-179 .
❏ Pressure control solenoid valve C. AT-188 .
❏ Shift solenoid valve A. AT-149 .
❏ Shift solenoid valve B. AT-154 .
❏ Shift solenoid valve C. AT-159 .
❏ Shift solenoid valve D. AT-169 .
4 ❏ Shift solenoid valve E. AT-174 .
❏ Pressure control solenoid valve C stuck ON. AT-193 .
❏ Shift solenoid valve C stuck ON. AT-164 .
❏ Manual mode switch circuit. AT-198 .
❏ TCM power input signal. AT-204 .
❏ Electric throttle control system. AT-209 .
❏ CAN communication. AT-83 .
❏ Battery
❏ Other
Idle inspection
❏ Engine Cannot Be Started in “P” and “N” Position. AT-212 .
❏ In “ P” Position, Vehicle Moves When Pushed. AT-212 .
4-2. ❏ In “N” Position Vehicle Moves. AT-213 . AT-58
❏ Large Shock “N” to “D” Position. AT-214 .
❏ Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position. AT-215 .
❏ Vehicle does Not Creep Forward In “D” Position. AT-216 .
Driving tests
Part 1
❏ Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1. AT-217 .
❏ A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2. AT-217 .
4-3.
❏ A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3. AT-218 . AT-60
❏ A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4. AT-219 .
❏ A/T Does Not Shift: D4 → D5. AT-220 .
❏ A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up. AT-221
❏ A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition. AT-222 .
❏ Lock-up Is Not Released. AT-223 .

Revision: August 2004 AT-50 2005 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Part 2
A
❏ Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1. AT-217 .
❏ A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2. AT-217 . AT-61
❏ A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3. AT-218 .
❏ A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4. AT-219 . B
Part 3
❏ Cannot Be Changed To Manual Mode. AT-224 .
❏ A/T Does Not Shift: 5th gear → 4th gear. AT-225 . AT
❏ A/T Does Not Shift: 4th gear → 3rd gear. AT-226 . AT-62
❏ A/T Does Not Shift: 3rd gear → 2nd gear. AT-226 .
❏ A/T Does Not Shift: 2nd gear → 1st gear. AT-227 .
❏ Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake. AT-228 . D
❏ Perform self-diagnostics Enter checks for detected items.
❏ Vehicle speed sensor·MTR. AT-86 .
❏ TCM processor. AT-88 . E
❏ PNP switch. AT-90 .
❏ A/T fluid temperature sensor circuit. AT-95 .
❏ A/T fluid temperature sensor performance. AT-100 .
❏ Turbine revolution sensor circuit. AT-105 . F
❏ Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor) circuit. AT-109 .
❏ Engine speed input circuit performance. AT-113 .
4 4-3
❏ 1st gear function. AT-115 .
❏ 2nd gear function. AT-118 . G
❏ 3rd gear function. AT-124 .
❏ 4th gear function. AT-130 .
❏ 5th gear function. AT-135 .
H
❏ Lock-up function. AT-141 .
❏ Shift function. AT-184 .
❏ Pressure control solenoid valve A. AT-144 .
❏ Pressure control solenoid valve B. AT-179 . I
❏ Pressure control solenoid valve C. AT-188 .
❏ Shift solenoid valve A. AT-149 .
❏ Shift solenoid valve B. AT-154 .
❏ Shift solenoid valve C. AT-159 . J
❏ Shift solenoid valve D. AT-169 .
❏ Shift solenoid valve E. AT-174 .
❏ Pressure control solenoid valve C stuck ON. AT-193 .
❏ Shift solenoid valve C stuck ON. AT-164 . K
❏ Manual mode switch circuit. AT-198 .
❏ TCM power input signal. AT-204 .
❏ Electric throttle control system. AT-209 .
❏ CAN communication. AT-83 . L
❏ Battery
❏ Other
❏ Inspect each system for items found to be NG in the self-diagnostics and repair or replace the malfunction M
5
parts.
6 ❏ Perform all road tests and enter the checks again for the required items. AT-57
❏ For any remaining NG items, perform the “diagnostics procedure” and repair or replace the malfunction parts.
7 See the chart for diagnostics by symptoms. (This chart also contains other symptoms and inspection proce- AT-64
dures.)
8 ❏ Erase the results of the self-diagnostics from the TCM. AT-82

Revision: August 2004 AT-51 2005 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

A/T Electrical Parts Location ECS00A19

WCIA0446E

Revision: August 2004 AT-52 2005 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Circuit Diagram ECS00A1A

AT

BCWA0296E

Revision: August 2004 AT-53 2005 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis ECS00A1B

A/T FLUID CHECK

Fluid leakage and fluid level check
● Inspect for fluid leakage and check the fluid level. Refer to MA-21, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
Fluid condition check
Inspect the fluid condition.
Fluid status Conceivable Cause Required Operation
Replace the A/T fluid and check the
Varnished (viscous Clutch, brake A/T main unit and the vehicle for
varnish state) scorched malfunctions (wire harnesses,
cooler pipes, etc.)
Milky white or Replace the A/T fluid and check for
Water in the fluid
cloudy places where water is getting in.
Large amount of Unusual wear of
Replace the A/T fluid and check for
metal powder mixed sliding parts within
improper operation of the A/T.
in A/T SAT638A

STALL TEST
Stall test procedure
1. Inspect the amount of engine oil. Replenish the engine oil if necessary.
2. Drive for about 10 minutes to warm up the vehicle so that the A/
T fluid temperature is 50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F). Inspect the
amount of A/T fluid. Replenish if necessary.
3. Switch of A/C and light etc. are off.

SAT647B

4. Securely engage the parking brake so that the tires do not turn.

SAT513G

5. Engine start, apply foot brake, and place selector lever in “D”
position.
6. While holding down the foot brake, gradually press down the
accelerator pedal.
7. Quickly read off the stall speed, then quickly remove your foot
from the accelerator pedal.
CAUTION:
Do not hold down the accelerator pedal for more than 5 sec-
onds during this test.
8. Move the selector lever to the “N” position. SAT514G
9. Cool down the A/T fluid.

Revision: August 2004 AT-54 2005 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

CAUTION:
Run the engine at idle for at least one minute. A
10. Repeat step 5 through 9 with selector lever in “manual mode” and “R” positions.
Stall speed: 2,430 - 2,730 rpm
B
Judgement stall test
Selector lever position
Possible cause AT
D, M R
● Line pressure is low (pressure control solenoid valve A malfunction, primary regulator
valve malfunction)
H O
● Forward clutch (slipping)
D
● One-way clutch No. 2
● Line pressure is low (pressure control solenoid valve A malfunction, primary regulator
valve malfunction)
E
O H
● Direct clutch (slipping)
Stall rotation ● 1st and reverse brake (slipping)
F
L L ● Engine or torque converter one-way clutch
● Line pressure is low (pressure control solenoid valve A malfunction, primary regulator
valve malfunction)
G
● B5 brake (slipping)
H H
● Oil pump
● Oil strainer (clogging)
H
● Oil leak for each range circuit
O: Stall speed within standard value position
H: Stall speed higher than standard value
I
L: Stall speed lower than standard value

TIME LAG TEST

Time lag test procedure J
1. Inspect the amount of engine oil. Replenish the engine oil if necessary.
2. Drive for about 10 minutes to warm up the vehicle so that the A/
T fluid temperature is 50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F). Check the K
amount of A/T fluid. Replenish if necessary.
3. Switch of A/C and light etc. are off.
L

SAT647B

4. Securely engage the parking brake so that the tires do not turn.
5. Engine start, apply foot brake.
6. Measure time lag by using stopwatch from moment when shift
lever is shifted in “N” to “D” position and “N” to “R” position until
moment slightly shock can be felt.
CAUTION:
● Make sure to take 3 measurement and take the average
value.
● Make sure to keep interval for more than one minute
between time lag tests. SAT513G
(That purpose is to remove clutch/brake pressure was
left unfinished.)

Revision: August 2004 AT-55 2005 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Time lag:
“N” to “D” position: Less than 0.7 sec.
“N” to “R” position: Less than 1.2 sec.
Judgement time lag test
Result of time lag test Possible cause
● Line pressure is low (pressure control solenoid valve A malfunction, primary regulator
valve malfunction)
Longer than standards “N” to “D” position ● Forward clutch (slipping)
● One-way clutch No. 2
● Oil leak for “D” range circuit
● Line pressure is low
● Direct clutch (slipping)
● 1st and reverse brake (slipping)
Longer than standards “N” to “R” position
● Oil leak for “R” range circuit
● Oil pump
● Oil strainer (clogging)

LINE PRESSURE TEST

Line pressure test port
Location of line pressure test port is show in the figure.

SCIA2669E

Line pressure test procedure

1. Inspect the amount of engine oil and replenish if necessary.
2. Drive the car for about 10 minutes to warm it up so that the A/T fluid reaches in range of 50 to 80°C (122
to 176°F), then inspect the amount of A/T fluid and replenish if necessary.
NOTE:
The automatic fluid temperature rises in range of 50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F) during 10 minutes of
driving.
3. Switch of A/C and light etc. are off.
4. After warming up A/T, remove the oil pressure detection plug and install the oil pressure gauge [SST:
(J34301-C)] and adapter [SST: (J45542)].
CAUTION:
Make sure to check no oil leak after installing oil pressure gage.
5. Securely engage the parking brake so that the tires do not turn.

SAT513G

Revision: August 2004 AT-56 2005 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

6. Start the engine, then measure the line pressure at both idle and
the stall speed. A
CAUTION:
● Keep the brake pedal pressed all the way down during
measurement. B
● When measuring the line pressure at the stall speed,
refer to AT-54, "STALL TEST" .
7. After the measurements are complete, install the oil pressure AT
detection plug and tighten to the specified torque.
:5.9 - 8.8 N·m (0.61 - 0.89 kg-m, 53 - 77 in-lb) SAT493G

D
CAUTION:
Do not reuse O-ring.
Line pressure E
Line pressure kPa (kg/cm2 , psi)
Engine speed
D, M positions R position
F
At idle speed 333 - 392 (3.4 - 4.0, 48 - 57) 500 - 608 (5.1 - 6.2, 73 - 88)
At stall speed 1,285 - 1,393 (13.1 - 14.2, 186 - 202) 1,706 - 1,981 (17.4 - 20.2, 247 - 287)

Judgement of line pressure test G

Judgement Possible cause

● Pressure control solenoid valve A malfunction H
Higher than standards both “D”, “M” and “R” positions
● Primary regulator valve malfunction
● Pressure control solenoid valve A malfunction
● Primary regulator valve malfunction I
Lower than standards both “D”, “M” and “R” positions ● Oil pump malfunction
● B5 bake malfunction
● Oil leak for each range circuit malfunction J
● Oil leak for “D” range circuit malfunction
Lower than standards only “D” position
● Forward clutch malfunction
● Oil leak for “R” range circuit malfunction
K
Lower than standards only “R” position ● Direct clutch malfunction
● 1st and reverse brake malfunction
L
ROAD TEST
Description
● The road test inspects overall performance of the A/T and analyzes possible malfunction causes. M
● The road test is perform in the following three stages.
1. Check before engine is started. Refer to AT-58 .
2. Check at idle. Refer to AT-58 .
3. Cruise test
● Inspect all the items from Part 1 to Part 3. Refer to AT-60 , AT-
61 , AT-62 .

SAT786A

Revision: August 2004 AT-57 2005 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

● Before beginning the road test, check the test procedure and
inspection items.
● Test all inspection items until the symptom is uncovered. Diag-
nose NG items when all road tests are complete.

SAT496G

Check Before Engine is Started ECS00A1C

1. CHECK A/T CHECK INDICATOR LAMP

1. Park vehicle on level surface.
2. Move selector lever to “P” position.
3. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Does A/T CHECK indicator lamp light up for about 2 seconds?
Yes >> 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Perform the self-diagnostics and record all NG items on the diagnostics worksheet. Refer to AT-
75 , AT-80 .
3. Go to AT-58, "Check at Idle" .
No >> Stop the road test and go to AT-210, "A/T CHECK Indicator Lamp does not come on" .
Check at Idle ECS00A1D

1. CHECK STARTING THE ENGINE

1. Park vehicle on level surface.
2. Move selector lever to “P” position.
3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
4. Turn ignition switch “START”.
Does the engine start?
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> Stop the road test and go to AT-212, "Engine Cannot Be Started In “P” or “N” Position" .

2. CHECK STARTING THE ENGINE

1. Turn ignition switch “ACC”.
2. Move selector lever in “D” or “R” position.
3. Turn ignition switch “START”.
Does the engine start in either position?
Yes >> Stop the road test and go to AT-212, "Engine Cannot Be Started In “P” or “N” Position" .
No >> GO TO 3.

Revision: August 2004 AT-58 2005 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

3. CHECK “P” POSITION FUNCTIONS A

1. Move selector lever to “P” position.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
3. Disengage the parking brake. B
4. Push the vehicle forward or backward.
5. Engage the parking brake.
AT
When you push the vehicle with disengaging the parking brake, does it move?
Yes >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle moves when pushed in “P” position” on the diagnostics worksheet,
then continue the road test.
D
No >> GO TO 4.

4. CHECK “N” POSITION FUNCTIONS

E
1. Start the engine.
2. Move selector lever to “N” position.
3. Disengage the parking brake. F
Does vehicle move forward or backward?
Yes >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle moves in “N” position” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue
the road test. G
No >> GO TO 5.

5. CHECK SHIFT SHOCK H

1. Engage the brake.
2. Move selector lever to “D” position.
I
When the transaxle is shifted from “N” to “D”, is there an excessive shock?
Yes >> Enter a check mark at “Large shock when shifted from N to D” on the diagnostics worksheet, then
continue the road test.
No >> GO TO 6. J

6. CHECK “R” POSITION FUNCTIONS

K
1. Engage the brake.
2. Move selector lever to “R” position.
3. Disengage the brake for 4 to 5 seconds. L
Does the vehicle creep backward?
Yes >> GO TO 7.
No >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle does not creep backward in R position” on the diagnostics work- M
sheet, then continue the road test.

7. CHECK “D” POSITION FUNCTIONS

Inspect whether the vehicle moves forward when the transaxle is put into the “D” position.
Does the vehicle move forward in the “D” positions?
Yes >> Go to AT-60, "Cruise Test - Part 1" , AT-61, "Cruise Test - Part 2" , and AT-62, "Cruise Test - Part
3" .
No >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle does not move forward in D positions” on the diagnostics work-
sheet, then continue the road test.

Revision: August 2004 AT-59 2005 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Cruise Test - Part 1 ECS00A1E

1. CHECK STARTING OUT FROM D1

1. Drive the vehicle for about 10 minutes to warm up the engine oil and A/T fluid.
Appropriate temperature for the A/T fluid: 50 - 80°C (122 - 176°F)
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface.
3. Move selector lever to “P” position.
4. Start the engine.
5. Move selector lever to “D” position.
6. Press the accelerator pedal about half way down to accelerate the vehicle.
With CONSULT-II
Read off the gear positions.
Starts from D1?
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle cannot be started from D1” on the diagnostics worksheet, then
continue the road test.

2. CHECK SHIFT-UP D1 → D2
Press down the accelerator pedal about half way and inspect if the vehicle shifts up (D1 → D2) at the appropri-
ate speed.
● Refer to AT-63 .
With CONSULT-II
Read the gear position, throttle degree of opening, and vehicle speed.
Does the A/T shift-up D1 → D2 at the correct speed?
Yes >> GO TO 3.
No >> Enter a check mark at “A/T does not shift D1 → D2” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue
the road test.

3. CHECK SHIFT-UP D2 → D3
Press down the accelerator pedal about half way and inspect if the vehicle shifts up (D2 → D3) at the appropri-
ate speed.
● Refer to AT-63 .
With CONSULT-II
Read the gear position, throttle degree of opening, and vehicle speed.
Does the A/T shift-up D2 → D3 at the correct speed?
Yes >> GO TO 4.
No >> Enter a check mark at “A/T does not shift D2 → D3” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue
the road test.

4. CHECK SHIFT-UP D3 → D4
Press down the accelerator pedal about half way and inspect if the vehicle shifts up (D3 → D4) at the appropri-
ate speed.
● Refer to AT-63 .
With CONSULT-II
Read the gear position, throttle degree of opening, and vehicle speed.
Does the A/T shift-up D3 → D4 at the correct speed?
Yes >> GO TO 5.
No >> Enter a check mark at “A/T does not shift D3 → D4” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue
the road test.

Revision: August 2004 AT-60 2005 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

5. CHECK SHIFT-UP D4 → D5 A
Press down the accelerator pedal about half way and inspect if the vehicle shifts up (D4 → D5) at the appropri-
ate speed.
● Refer to AT-63 . B
With CONSULT-II
Read the gear position, throttle degree of opening, and vehicle speed.
AT
Does the A/T shift-up D4 → D5 at the correct speed?
Yes >> GO TO 6.
No >> Enter a check mark at “A/T does not shift D4 → D5” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue
the road test. D

6. CHECK LOCK-UP
E
When releasing accelerator pedal from D5, check lock-up from D5 to L/U.
● Refer to AT-63 .
With CONSULT-II F
Read the lock-up status.
Does it lock-up?
Yes >> GO TO 7. G
No >> Enter a check mark at “A/T does not perform lock-up” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue
the road test.
H
7. CHECK LOCK-UP HOLD

Does it maintain lock-up status? I

Yes >> GO TO 8.
No >> Enter a check mark at “A/T hold does not lock-up condition” on the diagnostics worksheet, then
continue the road test. J

8. CHECK LOCK-UP RELEASE

K
Check lock-up cancellation by depressing brake pedal lightly to decelerate.
With CONSULT-II
Read the lock-up status. L
Does lock-up cancel?
Yes >> 1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Go to Cruise test - Part 2 (Refer to AT-61 ). M
No >> Enter a check mark at “Lock-up is not released” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the
road test. Go to Cruise test - Part 2 (Refer to AT-61 ).
Cruise Test - Part 2 ECS00A1F

1. CHECK STARTING FROM D1

1. Move selector lever the “D” position.
2. Accelerate at half throttle.
With CONSULT-II
Read the gear position.
Does it start from D1?
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle cannot be started from D1” on the diagnostics worksheet, then
continue the road test.

Revision: August 2004 AT-61 2005 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

2. CHECK SHIFT-UP D1 → D2
Press the accelerator pedal down all the way and inspect whether or not the transaxle shifts up (D1 → D2) at
the correct speed.
● Refer to AT-63 .
With CONSULT-II
Read the gear position, accelerator angle and vehicle speed.
Does the A/T shift-up D1 → D2 at the correct speed?
Yes >> GO TO 3.
No >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle does not shift D1 → D2” on the diagnostics worksheet, then con-
tinue the road test.

3. CHECK SHIFT-UP D2 → D3
Press the accelerator pedal down all the way and inspect whether or not the transaxle shifts up (D2 → D3) at
the correct speed.
● Refer to AT-63 .
With CONSULT-II
Read the gear position, accelerator angle and vehicle speed.
Does the A/T shift-up D2 → D3 at the correct speed?
Yes >> GO TO 4.
No >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle does not shift D2 → D3” on the diagnostics worksheet, then con-
tinue the road test.

4. CHECK SHIFT-UP D3 → D4 AND ENGINE BRAKE

When the transaxle changes speed D2 → D3, return the accelerator pedal.
Does the A/T shift-up D3 → D4 and apply the engine brake?
Yes >> 1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Go to Cruise test - Part 3 (Refer to AT-62 ).
No >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle does not shift D3 → D4” on the diagnostics worksheet, then con-
tinue the road test.
Cruise Test - Part 3 ECS00A1G

1. MANUAL MODE FUNCTION

Move to manual mode from D position.
Does it switch to manual mode?
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> Continue road test and add check mark to “Cannot be changed to manual mode” on diagnostics
worksheet.

2. CHECK SHIFT-DOWN
During manual mode driving, is downshift from M5 → M4 → M3 → M2 → M1 performed?
With CONSULT-II
Read the gear position.
Is downshifting correctly performed?
Yes >> GO TO 3.
No >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle does not shift” at the corresponding position (5th → 4th, 4th →
3rd, 3rd → 2nd, 2nd → 1st) on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test.

Revision: August 2004 AT-62 2005 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

3. CHECK ENGINE BRAKE A

Does engine braking effectively reduce speed in M1 position?

Yes >> 1. Stop the vehicle. B
2. Perform the self-diagnostics. Refer to AT-75, "SELF-DIAG RESULT MODE" , AT-80, "Diagnos-
tic Procedure Without CONSULT-II" .
No >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle does not decelerate by engine brake” on the diagnostics work- AT
sheet, then continue trouble diagnosis.
Shift Schedule ECS00A1H
D
VEHICLE SPEED WHEN SHIFTING GEARS
Vehicle speed km/h (MPH) (Approx.)
Accelerator angle
D1 →D2 D2 →D3 D3 →D4 D4 →D5 D5 →D4 D4 →D3 D3 →D2 D2 →D1 E
59 95 147 217 207 142 83 41
100 %
(37) (59) (91) (135) (129) (88) (52) (25)
59 95 147 217 207 142 83 41 F
90 %
(37) (59) (91) (135) (129) (88) (52) (25)
59 95 147 217 207 142 83 41
80 %
(37) (59) (91) (135) (129) (88) (52) (25) G
59 95 147 217 197 141 81 41
70 %
(37) (59) (91) (135) (122) (88) (50) (25)
59 95 147 217 190 135 76 41 H
60 %
(37) (59) (91) (135) (118) (84) (47) (25)
59 90 137 202 176 123 69 41
50 %
(37) (56) (85) (126) (109) (76) (43) (25) I
50 82 117 172 148 92 54 32
40 %
(31) (51) (73) (107) (92) (57) (34) (20)
37 62 87 127 105 59 35 19 J
30 %
(23) (39) (54) (79) (65) (37) (22) (12)
27 44 59 87 60 40 22 8
20 %
(17) (27) (37) (54) (37) (25) (14) (5)
K
19 27 35 55 44 32 22 8
10 %
(12) (17) (22) (34) (27) (20) (14) (5)

VEHICLE SPEED WHEN PERFORMING AND RELEASING COMPLETE LOCK-UP L

Vehicle speed km/h (MPH) (Approx.)
Accelerator angle
Lock-up “ON” Lock-up “OFF”
M
50 % 217 (135) 195 (121)
15% 108 (67) 70 (43)
0-8% 66 (41) 63 (39)
● Lock-up vehicle speed indicates the speed in D position.
● Perform lock-up inspection after warming up engine.
● Lock-up vehicle speed may vary depending on the driving conditions and circumstances.

VEHICLE SPEED WHEN PERFORMING AND RELEASING SLIP LOCK-UP

Vehicle speed km/h (MPH) (Approx.)
Accelerator angle Gear position
Slip lock-up “ON” Slip lock-up “OFF”
4th 41 (25) 38 (24)
0 - 10 %
5th 53 (33) 50 (31)

● Slip lock-up vehicle speed indicates the speed in D position.

● Perform slip lock-up inspection after warming up engine.

Revision: August 2004 AT-63 2005 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

● Slip lock-up vehicle speed may vary depending on the driving conditions and circumstances.

Symptom Chart ECS00A1I

Numbers are arranged in order of inspection.

Perform inspections starting with number one and work up.
CAUTION:
Do not remove or disassemble any RE5F22A model transaxle parts unless specified to do so in AT
section.
Reference
Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item
page
1. Fluid level and state AT-54
AT-240, AT-
2. Control cable and PNP switch adjustment
238
ON vehicle
3. TCM AT-71
With selector lever in D position, driving is 4. Pressure control solenoid valve A AT-144
not possible.
5. Control valve assembly AT-241
6. Torque converter AT-243
7. Forward and direct clutch assembly AT-252
OFF vehicle
8. B5 brake AT-280
9. One-way clutch No.2 AT-252
1. Fluid level and state AT-54
AT-241, AT-
2. Control cable and PNP switch adjustment
238
3. TCM AT-71
ON vehicle
4. Shift solenoid valve A AT-149
5. Shift solenoid valve B AT-154
With selector lever in R position, driving is
not possible. 6. Pressure control solenoid valve A AT-144
7. Control valve assembly AT-241
8. Torque converter AT-252
9. Forward and direct clutch assembly AT-252
OFF vehicle
10. 1st and reverse brake AT-252
11. B5 brake AT-280
1. Fluid level and state AT-54
AT-240, AT-
2. Control cable and PNP switch adjustment
238
3. TCM AT-71
4. Shift solenoid valve A AT-149
No shock at all or the clutch slips when ON vehicle
5. Shift solenoid valve B AT-154
vehicle changes speed.
6. Shift solenoid valve E AT-174
7. Pressure control solenoid valve A AT-144
8. Pressure control solenoid valve C AT-188
9. Control valve assembly AT-241
OFF vehicle 10. Accumulator AT-252

Revision: August 2004 AT-64 2005 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Reference
Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item
page A
1. Fluid level and state AT-54
2. Actual engine torque signal AT-113
B
ON vehicle 3. Turbine revolution sensor AT-105
Time lag is large. (“N” →“ D” position) 4. TCM AT-71
5. Control valve assembly AT-241 AT
6. Accumulator AT-252
OFF vehicle
7. Forward and direct clutch assembly AT-252
D
1. Fluid level and state AT-54
2. Actual engine torque signal AT-113
3. Turbine revolution sensor AT-105 E
ON vehicle
4. TCM AT-71
Time lag is large. (“N” →“ R” position)
5. Shift solenoid valve E AT-174
6. Control valve assembly AT-241 F
7. Forward and direct clutch assembly AT-252
OFF vehicle
8. 1st and reverse brake AT-252
G
1. Ignition switch and starter PG-3, SC-10
Engine does not start in “N”, “P” position. ON vehicle 2. Control cable adjustment AT-240
3. PNP switch AT-90 H
1. Ignition switch and starter PG-3, SC-10
Engine starts in positions other than “N” or
ON vehicle 2. Control cable adjustment AT-240
“P”. I
3. PNP switch AT-90
1. Fluid level and state AT-54
2. TCM AT-71 J
Engine stalls when selector lever shifted “N”
ON vehicle 3. Shift solenoid valve D AT-169
→ “D”, “R”.
4. Pressure control solenoid valve C AT-188
K
5. Control valve assembly AT-241
1. Fluid level and state AT-54
2. TCM AT-71 L
3. Shift solenoid valve D AT-169
Engine stall when vehicle slow down. ON vehicle
4. Shift solenoid valve E AT-174
5. Pressure control solenoid valve C AT-188
M
6. Control valve assembly AT-241
1. Fluid level and state AT-54
AT-240, AT-
2. Control cable and PNP switch adjustment
Acceleration is extremely poor. ON vehicle 238
3. Engine speed signal AT-113
4. Electric throttle control signal AT-209

Revision: August 2004 AT-65 2005 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Reference
Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item
page
1. Fluid level and state AT-54
2. TCM AT-71
3. Electric throttle control signal AT-209
4. Shift solenoid valve A AT-149
ON vehicle
5. Shift solenoid valve B AT-154
6. Shift solenoid valve C AT-159
Gear does not change from D1 → D2 or
from M1 → M2 . 7. Shift solenoid valve D AT-169
8. Control valve assembly AT-241
AT-272, AT-
9. 2nd coast brake
278

OFF vehicle 10. 2nd brake AT-272

11. One-way clutch No.1 AT-278
12. One-way clutch No.2 AT-252
1. Fluid level and state AT-54
2. TCM AT-71
3. Electric throttle control signal AT-209
4. Shift solenoid valve B AT-154
ON vehicle
Gear does not change from D2 → D3 or 5. Shift solenoid valve C AT-159
from M2 → M3 . 6. Shift solenoid valve D AT-169
7. Pressure control solenoid valve A AT-144
8. Control valve assembly AT-241
9. U/D brake AT-252
OFF vehicle
10. B5 brake AT-280
1. Fluid level and state AT-54
2. TCM AT-71
3. Electric throttle control signal AT-209
ON vehicle 4. Shift solenoid valve B AT-154
Gear does not change from D3 → D4 or
5. Shift solenoid valve C AT-159
from M3 → M4 .
6. Shift solenoid valve D AT-169
7. Control valve assembly AT-241
8. U/D clutch AT-252
OFF vehicle
9. U/D brake AT-252
1. Fluid level and state AT-54
2. TCM AT-71
3. Electric throttle control signal AT-209
ON vehicle
4. Shift solenoid valve B AT-154
Gear does not change from D4 → D5 or 5. Shift solenoid valve C AT-159
from M4 → M5 .
6. Control valve assembly AT-241
7. Forward and direct clutch assembly AT-252
AT-272, AT-
OFF vehicle 8. 2nd coast brake
278
9. One-way clutch No.1 AT-278

Revision: August 2004 AT-66 2005 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Reference
Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item
page A
1. Fluid level and state AT-54
2. TCM AT-71
B
3. Electric throttle control signal AT-209
4. Shift solenoid valve A AT-149
ON vehicle
5. Shift solenoid valve B AT-154 AT
6. Shift solenoid valve C AT-159
In D or M range, does not downshift to 1st
gear. 7. Shift solenoid valve D AT-169
D
8. Control valve assembly AT-241
AT-272, AT-
9. 2nd coast brake
278
E
OFF vehicle 10. 2nd brake AT-272
11. One-way clutch No.1 AT-278
12. One-way clutch No.2 AT-252 F
1. Fluid level and state AT-54
2. TCM AT-71
3. Electric throttle control signal AT-209
G

4. Shift solenoid valve B AT-154

ON vehicle
In D or M range, does not downshift to 2nd 5. Shift solenoid valve C AT-159 H
gear. 6. Shift solenoid valve D AT-169
7. Pressure control solenoid valve A AT-144
8. Control valve assembly AT-241 I
9. U/D brake AT-252
OFF vehicle
10. B5 brake AT-280
J
1. Fluid level and state AT-54
2. TCM AT-71
3. Electric throttle control signal AT-209 K
ON vehicle 4. Shift solenoid valve B AT-154
In D or M range, does not downshift to 3rd
5. Shift solenoid valve C AT-159
gear. L
6. Shift solenoid valve D AT-169
7. Control valve assembly AT-241
8. U/D clutch AT-252 M
OFF vehicle
9. U/D brake AT-252
1. Fluid level and state AT-54
2. TCM AT-71
3. Electric throttle control signal AT-209
ON vehicle
4. Shift solenoid valve B AT-154
In D or M range, does not downshift to 4th 5. Shift solenoid valve C AT-159
gear.
6. Control valve assembly AT-241
7. Forward and direct clutch assembly AT-252
AT-272, AT-
OFF vehicle 8. 2nd coast brake
278
9. One-way clutch No.1 AT-278

Revision: August 2004 AT-67 2005 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Reference
Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item
page
1. Fluid level and state AT-54
2. Stop lamp switch signal AT-229
3. ATF temperature sensor AT-95
4. TCM AT-71
ON vehicle
Does not lock-up or lock-up is not released. 5. Shift solenoid valve C AT-159
6. Shift solenoid valve D AT-169
7. Pressure control solenoid valve C AT-188
8. Control valve assembly AT-241
OFF vehicle 9. Torque converter AT-243
1. Fluid level and state AT-54
2. TCM AT-71
ON vehicle 3. Shift solenoid valve E AT-174
4. Electric throttle control signal AT-209
Engine brake does not work. 5. Control valve assembly AT-241
AT-272, AT-
6. 2nd coast brake
278
OFF vehicle
7. U/D brake AT-252
8. B5 brake AT-280
1. Pressure control solenoid valve A AT-144
2. Engine speed signal AT-113
3. Electric throttle control signal AT-209
Shift point is high or low. ON vehicle
4. Revolution sensor AT-109
5. TCM AT-71
6. Control valve assembly AT-241
1. Fluid level and state AT-54
2. Actual engine torque signal AT-113
3. Turbine revolution sensor AT-105
4. ATF temperature sensor AT-95
ON vehicle 5. Shift solenoid valve A AT-149
Large shock. (“N” →“ D” position) 6. Shift solenoid valve B AT-154
7. Pressure control solenoid valve A AT-144
8. TCM AT-71
9. Control valve assembly AT-241
10. Accumulator AT-252
OFF vehicle
11. Forward and direct clutch assembly AT-252

Revision: August 2004 AT-68 2005 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Reference
Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item
page A
1. Fluid level and state AT-54
2. Actual engine torque signal AT-113
B
3. Turbine revolution sensor AT-105
4. ATF temperature sensor AT-95
ON vehicle
5. Shift solenoid valve E AT-174 AT
Large shock. (“N” →“ R” position)
6. Pressure control solenoid valve B AT-179
7. TCM AT-71
D
8. Control valve assembly AT-241
9. Forward and direct clutch assembly AT-252
OFF vehicle
10. 1st and reverse brake AT-252 E
1. Fluid level and state AT-54
2. Actual engine torque signal AT-113
3. Turbine revolution sensor AT-105 F
4. ATF temperature sensor AT-95
5. TCM power input signal AT-204
G
6. Shift solenoid valve A AT-149
7. Shift solenoid valve B AT-154
Shock is too large when shift up. ON vehicle 8. Shift solenoid valve C AT-159 H
9. Shift solenoid valve D AT-169
10. Shift solenoid valve E AT-174
I
11. Pressure control solenoid valve A AT-144
12. Pressure control solenoid valve B AT-179
13. Pressure control solenoid valve C AT-188 J
14. TCM AT-71
15. Control valve assembly AT-241
K
1. Fluid level and state AT-54
2. Actual engine torque signal AT-113
3. Turbine revolution sensor AT-105 L
4. ATF temperature sensor AT-95
5. TCM power input signal AT-204
6. Shift solenoid valve A AT-149
M
7. Shift solenoid valve B AT-154
Shock is too large for coast down. ON vehicle 8. Shift solenoid valve C AT-159
9. Shift solenoid valve D AT-169
10. Shift solenoid valve E AT-174
11. Pressure control solenoid valve A AT-144
12. Pressure control solenoid valve B AT-179
13. Pressure control solenoid valve C AT-188
14. TCM AT-71
15. Control valve assembly AT-241

Revision: August 2004 AT-69 2005 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Reference
Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item
page
1. Fluid level and state AT-54
2. Actual engine torque signal AT-113
3. Turbine revolution sensor AT-105
4. ATF temperature sensor AT-95
5. TCM power input signal AT-204
6. Shift solenoid valve A AT-149
7. Shift solenoid valve B AT-154
Shock is too large for kick down. ON vehicle 8. Shift solenoid valve C AT-159
9. Shift solenoid valve D AT-169
10. Shift solenoid valve E AT-174
11. Pressure control solenoid valve A AT-144
12. Pressure control solenoid valve B AT-179
13. Pressure control solenoid valve C AT-188
14. TCM AT-71
15. Control valve assembly AT-241
1. Fluid level and state AT-54
ON vehicle
2. Control valve assembly AT-241
Strange noise in “R”,“N” or“ D” position.
3. Torque converter AT-252
OFF vehicle 4. Parking component AT-272
5. Gear system AT-252
1. PNP switch AT-90
With selector lever in P position, vehicle
does not enter parking condition or, with ON vehicle 2. Control cable adjustment AT-240
selector lever in another position, parking 3. Control valve assembly AT-241
condition is not cancelled.
OFF vehicle 4. Parking component AT-272
1. Fluid level and state AT-54
2. PNP switch AT-90
Vehicle runs with transaxle in “ P” position. ON vehicle AT-240, AT-
3. Control cable and PNP switch adjustment
238
4. Line pressure test AT-56
1. Fluid level and state AT-54
2. PNP switch AT-90
Vehicle runs with transaxle in “N” position. ON vehicle AT-240, AT-
3. Control cable and PNP switch adjustment
238
4. Line pressure test AT-56

Revision: August 2004 AT-70 2005 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values ECS00A1J

TCM TERMINAL CONNECTOR LAYOUT A

AT

D
WCIA0447E

Revision: August 2004 AT-71 2005 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

TCM INSPECTION TABLE

Data are reference value and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Wire Data (Approx.)
Terminal Item Condition
color

When turning ignition switch ON. 0 - 1.5V

1 L/B A/T PV IGN relay

When turning ignition switch OFF. 0V

3 L CAN-H – –
4 P CAN-L – –

Manual mode Selector lever: + side 0V

5 R/G
switch UP (+) Other than the above Battery voltage

Manual mode Selector lever: - side 0V

6 L/R
switch DOWN (-) Other than the above Battery voltage
14 B Ground Always 0V

Manual mode Selector lever: “P”, “R”, “N” or “D” position 0V

16 SB
switch AUTO Selector lever: Manual shift gate position Battery voltage
Selector lever: Manual shift gate position
Manual mode 0V
19 V/R (neutral)
switch MANUAL
Other than the above Battery voltage
Pressure control
When engine is running with idle speed
21 G/B solenoid valve B 0V
and setting selector lever to “P” position.
ground

When turning ignition switch ON. Battery voltage

Revolution sensor
22 L
power supply
When turning ignition switch OFF. 0V

When turning ignition switch ON. Battery voltage

Turbine revolution
23 G sensor power sup-
ply
When turning ignition switch OFF. 0V

Selector lever: “P” and “R” position 0V

24 O/L PNP switch A
Other than the above Battery voltage

When shift solenoid valve B operates. Battery voltage

Shift solenoid (When driving in 1st or 5th gear.)
25 G/R
valve B When shift solenoid valve B does not oper-
0V
ate.
When shift solenoid valve D operates.
Battery voltage
Shift solenoid (When driving in 3rd, 4th or 5th gear.)
26 V/W
valve D When shift solenoid valve D does not oper-
0V
ate.
Power supply
27 Y/R Always Battery voltage
(Memory back-up)

Revision: August 2004 AT-72 2005 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Wire Data (Approx.)

Terminal Item Condition
color A
Pressure control
When engine is running with idle speed
28 W solenoid valve C 0V
and setting selector lever to “P” position.
ground B
When moving at 20 km/h (12 MPH) in 1st
29 B/W Revolution sensor 119Hz
gear.

Turbine revolution When moving at 20 km/h (12 MPH) in 1st

AT
30 R 371Hz
sensor gear.

Selector lever: “R”, “N”, “D” and manual D

0V
mode position
31 BR PNP switch B
Battery voltage
Other than the above
E
Selector lever: “D” and manual mode posi- 0V
tion
32 P/B PNP switch C
Battery voltage
Other than the above F

Battery voltage
Selector lever: “P” and “N” position
33 LG PNP switch PN G
0V
Other than the above

H
When turning ignition switch ON. Battery voltage

34 Y Power supply
I
When turning ignition switch OFF. 0V

Pressure control When engine is running with idle speed

35 L/Y 300Hz J
solenoid valve A and setting selector lever to “P” position.
Pressure control When engine is running with idle speed
36 O/B 300Hz
solenoid valve B and setting selector lever to “P” position.
K
When shift solenoid valve C operates.
(When driving in 1st, 2nd, 3rd or reverse Battery voltage
Shift solenoid gear.)
37 R/B
valve C L
When shift solenoid valve C does not oper-
0V
ate.

When turning ignition switch ON. Battery voltage M

Power supply
38 R/Y
(A/T PV IGN relay)
Measure 3 seconds after switching “OFF”
0V
the ignition switch.

When turning ignition switch ON. Battery voltage

Power supply
39 R/Y (A/T PV IGN
relay)
Measure 3 seconds after switching “OFF”
0V
the ignition switch.

Pressure control
When engine is running with idle speed
40 L/G solenoid valve A 0V
and setting selector lever to “P” position.
ground

Revision: August 2004 AT-73 2005 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Wire Data (Approx.)

Terminal Item Condition
color
When ATF temperature 0°C (32°F) 4.0V 9.8 kΩ

Fluid temperature When ATF temperature 20°C (68°F) 3.0V 4.2 kΩ

41 R/Y
sensor When ATF temperature 80°C (176°F) 0.8V 0.54 kΩ
When ATF temperature 100°C (212°F) 0.5V 0.31 kΩ
Fluid temperature
42 LG Always 0V
sensor ground
Selector lever: “P” and “N” position 0V
43 V/W PNP switch PA
Other than the above Battery voltage

Pressure control When engine is running with idle speed

45 O 300Hz
solenoid valve C and setting selector lever to “P” position.

When shift solenoid valve A operates.

Battery voltage
Shift solenoid (When driving in 1st gear.)
46 W/G
valve A When shift solenoid valve A does not oper-
0V
ate.
When shift solenoid valve E operates.
Battery voltage
Shift solenoid (When driving in reverse gear.)
47 BR/Y
valve E When shift solenoid valve E does not oper-
0V
ate.
48 B Ground Always 0V

CONSULT-II Function (TCM) ECS00A1K

CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
TCM diagnostic mode Description
Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the TCM for setting the status
WORK SUPPORT suitable for required operation, input/output signals are received from the TCM and received data is
displayed.
SELF-DIAG RESULTS Displays TCM self-diagnosis results.
DATA MONITOR Displays TCM input/output data in real time.
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
ACTIVE TEST Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them.
FUNCTION TEST Conducted by CONSULT-II instead of a technician to determine whether each system is "OK" or "NG".
ECU PART NUMBER TCM part number can be read.

After performing “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH CONSULT-II)” (Refer to AT-75 ), place check
marks for results on the AT-49, "DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET" . Reference pages are provided following the
items.
NOTICE:
1. The CONSULT-II electrically displays shift timing and lock-up timing (that is, operation timing of each sole-
noid).
Check for time difference between actual shift timing and the CONSULT-II display. If the difference is
noticeable, mechanical parts (except solenoids, sensors, etc.) may be malfunctioning. Check mechanical
parts using applicable diagnostic procedures.
2. Shift schedule (which implies gear position) displayed on CONSULT-II and that indicated in Service Man-
ual may differ slightly. This occurs because of the following reasons:
– Actual shift schedule has more or less tolerance or allowance,
– Shift schedule indicated in Service Manual refers to the point where shifts start, and
– Gear position displayed on CONSULT-II indicates the point where shifts are completed.
3. Display of solenoid valves on CONSULT-II changes at the start of shifting, while gear position is displayed
upon completion of shifting (which is computed by TCM).

Revision: August 2004 AT-74 2005 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

4. Additional CONSULT-II information can be found in the Operation Manual supplied with the CONSULT-II
unit. A
CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be B
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carry out CAN communication.
● For details, refer to the separate “CONSULT-II Operations Man-
ual”. AT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data
link connector, which is located in driver instrument panel D
(lower).
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
E

LCIA0042E
F
4. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”.

I
BCIA0029E

5. Touch “A/T”. J
If “A/T” is not indicated, go to GI-36, "CONSULT-II Data Link
Connector (DLC) Circuit" .
6. Perform each diagnostic test mode according to each service
K
procedure.

BCIA0030E M
WORK SUPPORT MODE
Work item
Work item Condition Usage
INITIALIZATION Under the following conditions. Use to initialize TCM in a case of replacing tran-
● Ignition switch “ON”. saxle or TCM. Refer to AT-8, "Precautions for A/
T Assembly or TCM Replacement" .
● Selector lever “P” or “N” position.
● Engine not running.
● Vehicle speed is 0 km/h (0 MPH).
● Ignition voltage is more than 10.5V.
● Malfunction was not detected.

SELF-DIAG RESULT MODE

Operation procedure
1. Perform “CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE”. Refer to AT-75, "CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE"
.

Revision: August 2004 AT-75 2005 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

2. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.

Display shows malfunction experienced since the last erasing
operation.
NOTE:
● The details for “TIME” are as follow:

– “CRNT”: Error currently detected with TCM.

– “PAST”: Error detected in the past and memorized with

TCM.
● Touch “F.F.DATA” on “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” screen to
display freeze frame data. Freeze frame data shows driv- SCIA2741E
ing condition when malfunction is detected.
For freeze frame data items, refer to AT-76, "Display item list" .
Display item list
X: Applicable —: Not applicable
TCM self-diagnosis OBD-II (DTC)
MIL indicator
Items (CONSULT-II A/T CHECK “TRANSMIS- lamp*1 ,
Malfunction is detected when...
screen terms) indicator SION” with “ENGINE” with
lamp*3 CONSULT-II CONSULT-II or
GST
CAN COMM CIR-
● When a malfunction is detected in CAN communications X U1000*4 U1000*4
CUIT
VEH SPD SE/CIR- ● ECM detects a malfunction in vehicle speed sensor signal,
X P0500 P0500
MTR after that TCM inputs the result by CAN communication.
TCM PROCESSOR ● TCM processor is malfunctioning. — P0613 —
PNP SW/CIRC ● PNP switch signals input with impossible pattern X P0705 P0705
● Normal voltage is not applied to ATF temperature sensor
ATF TEMP SEN/ due to open, short, and so on.
X P0710 P0710
CIRC ● During running, the ATF temperature sensor signal voltage
is excessively high or low.
FLUID TEMP SEN ● ATF temperature signal does not change. — P0711 P0711*2
● Signal from turbine revolution sensor does not input due to
TURBINE SENSOR open, short, and so on. X P0717 P0717
● Unexpected signal input during running.
● Signal from revolution sensor does not input due to open,
VHCL SPEED short, and so on. X P0722 P0722
SEN-A/T
● Unexpected signal input during running.
● Malfunction is detected in engine speed signal, actual
ENG SPD INP
engine torque signal or torque reduction signal that is out- X P0726 P0726
PERFOR
put from ECM through CAN communication.
A/T 1ST GR ● A/T cannot be shifted to the 1st gear position even if elec-
FNCTN trical circuit is good.
X P0731 P0731*2

A/T 2ND GR ● A/T cannot be shifted to the 2nd gear position even if elec-
FNCTN trical circuit is good.
X P0732 P0732*2

A/T 3RD GR ● A/T cannot be shifted to the 3rd gear position even if elec-
FNCTN trical circuit is good.
X P0733 P0733*2

A/T 4TH GR ● A/T cannot be shifted to the 4th gear position even if elec-
FNCTN trical circuit is good.
X P0734 P0734*2

A/T 5TH GR ● A/T cannot be shifted to the 5th gear position even if elec-
FNCTN trical circuit is good.
X P0735 P0735*2

A/T TCC S/V ● A/T cannot perform lock-up even if electrical circuit is
X P0744 P0744*2
FNCTN good.

Revision: August 2004 AT-76 2005 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

TCM self-diagnosis OBD-II (DTC)

A
MIL indicator
Items (CONSULT-II A/T CHECK “TRANSMIS- *1
lamp ,
Malfunction is detected when...
screen terms) indicator SION” with “ENGINE” with
lamp*3 CONSULT-II CONSULT-II or B
GST
PC SOL A(L/
X P0745 P0745
PRESS) ● Normal voltage is not applied to solenoid due to open, AT
SHIFT SOL A short, and so on. X P0750 P0750
● TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with
SHIFT SOL B X P0755 P0755
monitor value.
SHIFT SOL C X P0760 P0760 D
● Condition of shift solenoid valve C is different from monitor
SFT SOL C STUCK
ON
value, and relation between gear position and actual gear X P0762 P0762*2
ratio is irregular. E
SHIFT SOL D ● Normal voltage is not applied to solenoid due to open, X P0765 P0765
SHIFT SOL E short, and so on. X P0770 P0770
● TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with F
PC SOL B(SFT/
monitor value. X P0775 P0775
PRS)
● No rotation change occurs between input (turbine revolu-
tion sensor) and output (revolution sensor) and shifting G
SHIFT time is long. X P0780 P0780*2
● Shifting ends immediately.
● Condition in malfunction engine revs up usually shifting. H
● Normal voltage is not applied to solenoid due to open,
PC SOL short, and so on.
X P0795 P0795
C(TCC&SFT) ● TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with I
monitor value.
● Condition of pressure control solenoid valve C is different
PC SOL C STC ON from monitor value, and relation between gear position X P0797 P0797*2 J
and actual gear ratio or lock-up status is irregular.
MANUAL MODE ● Manual mode switch signal is incorrectly input due to
— P0826 —
SWITCH open, short, and so on.
K
TCM POWER INPT
● Voltage supplied to TCM is too low. — P0882 P0882
SIG
● The electric throttle control system for ECM is in a mal- L
ELEC TH CON-
function, after that TCM inputs the result by CAN commni- X P1726 P1726
TROL
cation.
NO DTC IS
DETECTED. M
FURTHER TEST- ● No NG item has been detected. — X X
ING MAY BE
REQUIRED.
*1: Refer to AT-43, "Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)" .
*2: These malfunctions cannot be displayed MIL if another malfunction is assigned to MIL.
*3: Indicate it when performing TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS). Refer to AT-80, "TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" .
*4: If DTC U1000 is displayed with other DTCs, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000. Refer to AT-83 .

DATA MONITOR MODE

Operation procedure
1. Perform “CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE”. Refer to AT-75, "CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE"
.
2. Touch “DATA MONITOR”.
NOTE:
When malfunction is detected, CONSULT-II performs REAL-TIME DIAGNOSIS.
Also, any malfunction detected while in this mode will be displayed at real time.

Revision: August 2004 AT-77 2005 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Display item list

X: Standard —: Not applicable
Monitor item selection
SELEC-
Monitored item (Unit) ECU Remarks
MAIN SIG- TION
INPUT
NALS FROM
SIGNALS
MENU
Vehicle speed recognized by the
VHCL/S SE-A/T (km/h) X X X
TCM.
VHCL/S SE-MTR* (km/h) X — X
FLUID TEMP SE* (V) X — X
FLUID TEMP* (°C) — — X
Displays status of engine coolant
temperature.
COOLAN TEMP* (°C) — — X
Signal input with CAN communica-
tion line.
BATTERY VOLT* (V) X — X
Signal input with CAN communica-
ENGINE SPEED* (rpm) X X X
tion line.
Turbine revolution computed from
TURBINE REV* (rpm) X — X signal of turbine revolution sensor is
displayed.
Output revolution computed from
OUTPUT REV* (rpm) — — X signal of revolution sensor is dis-
played.
PNP SW A* (ON/OFF) X — X
PNP SW B* (ON/OFF) X — X
PNP SW C* (ON/OFF) X — X
PNP SW PA* (ON/OFF) X — X
PNP SW PN (ON/OFF) X — X
MANU MODE SW* (ON/OFF) X — X
NON M-MODE SW* (ON/OFF) X — X
UP SW* (ON/OFF) X — X
DOWN SW* (ON/OFF) X — X
RANGE SLCT SW (ON/OFF) X — X Not mounted but displayed.
This means stop lamp switch signal
BRAKE SW* (ON/OFF) X — X
via CAN communication line.
CLSO THL POS (ON/OFF) X — X
ASCD SIGNAL (ON/OFF) X — X
Signal input with CAN communica-
ASCD OD OFF (ON/OFF) X — X
tion line.
ABS SIGNAL (ON/OFF) X — X
TCS SIGNAL (ON/OFF) X — X
TCS GEAR HOLD (ON/OFF) X — X
Requests TCM for shift schedule
TCS SFT CNG (ON/OFF) — — X
change.
Always “ON” during lock-up, regard-
LOCK-UP* (ON/OFF) — — X
less of types.
Displays “##” in manual mode or
SLCT LVR POSI* — — X
when unknown.
Displays “##” in non-manual mode
MANU GR POSI — — X
or when unknown.

Revision: August 2004 AT-78 2005 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Monitor item selection

A
SELEC-
Monitored item (Unit) ECU Remarks
MAIN SIG- TION
INPUT
NALS FROM
SIGNALS
MENU B
Indicates current gear position. Also
when setting in P or N position, indi-
GEAR* — — X cate by shift solenoid valves.
Displays “##” in R position or when
AT
unknown.
Displays “##” in R position or when
NEXT GR POSI — — X D
unknown.
Displays status of engine torque
REDCT DEM SIG (ON/OFF) — — X
reduction demand signal.
TC SLIP RATIO — — X E
Difference between engine speed
SLIP REV (rpm) — — X and torque converter input shaft
speed. F
Degree of opening for accelerator
recognized by the TCM.
ACCELE ANGLE* (%) X X X
For fail-safe operation, the specific G
value used for control is displayed.
PC SOL A OUT* (A) — — X
PC SOL A MON* (A) — X X H
PC SOL B OU*T (A) — — X
PC SOL B MON* (A) — X X
PC SOL C OUT* (A) — — X
I

PC SOL C MON* (A) — X X

SFT SOL A OUT* (ON/OFF) — — X J
SFT SOL B OUT* (ON/OFF) — — X
SFT SOL C OUT* (ON/OFF) — — X
SFT SOL D OUT* (ON/OFF) — — X K
SFT SOL E OUT* (ON/OFF) — — X
SFT SOL A MON* (ON/OFF) — X X
L
SFT SOL B MON* (ON/OFF) — X X
SFT SOL C MON* (ON/OFF) — X X
SFT SOL D MON* (ON/OFF) — X X M
SFT SOL E MON* (ON/OFF) — X X
G-RATE (G) — — X
Numbers indicate types of fail-safe
F-SAFE MODE (OK/1 to 10) — X X modes. Refer to AT-45, "Fail-safe
mode list" .
Signal input with CAN communica-
VDC SIGNAL (ON/OFF) X — X
tion line.
The details for data of shift schedule
are as follow:
NOR: Normal mode
UP1: Upslope 1 mode
UP2: Upslope 2 mode (steeper than
SHIFT SCHDULE — — X
“UP1”)
DOWN: Downslope mode
HOT1: Hot 1 mode
HOT2: Hot 2 mode (higher tempera-
ture than “HOT1”)

Revision: August 2004 AT-79 2005 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Monitor item selection

SELEC-
Monitored item (Unit) ECU Remarks
MAIN SIG- TION
INPUT
NALS FROM
SIGNALS
MENU
Displays the value measured by the
Voltage (V) — — X
voltage probe.
Frequency (Hz) — — X
DUTY-HI (high) (%) — — X
The value measured by the pulse
DUTY-LOW (low) (%) — — X
probe is displayed.
PLS WIDTH-HI (ms) — — X
PLS WIDTH-LOW (ms) — — X
*: Also, the items appear on CONSULT-II screen in freeze frame data mode of self-diagnostic results only if DTC is detected. For details,
refer to AT-75, "SELF-DIAG RESULT MODE" .

ACTIVE TEST MODE

Test item
Test item Condition Description
SHIFT SOLENOID A
SHIFT SOLENOID B Under the following conditions.
● Ignition switch “ON” Each shift solenoid operate ON/OFF by receiving the
SHIFT SOLENOID C
drive signal.
● Selector lever “P” or “N” position
SHIFT SOLENOID D
● Engine not running
SHIFT SOLENOID E
● Vehicle speed is 0 km/h (0 MPH).
PRESSURE CONTROL SOL A ● Ignition voltage is more than 10.5V.
Each pressure control solenoid is activated by receiv-
PRESSURE CONTROL SOL B ● Malfunction was not detected.* ing the drive signal.
PRESSURE CONTROL SOL C
*: Except when P0711, P0731, P0732, P0733, P0734, P0735, P0744, P0762, P0780 or P0797 is detected.
NOTE:
Approximately 10 seconds after the operation is begun, “TEST IS STOPPED” will be displayed.

Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT-II ECS00A1L

OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH GST)

Refer to EC-143, "Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function" .
OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)
Refer toEC-64, "Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)" .
TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)
Description
As a method for locating the suspect system, when the self-diagnostics start signal is input, the memory for
the malfunction location is output and the A/T CHECK indicator lamp flashes to display the corresponding
DTC.

Revision: August 2004 AT-80 2005 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Diagnostic procedure
A
1. CHECK A/T CHECK INDICATOR LAMP
1. Start the engine with selector lever in “P” position. Warm engine to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON” and “OFF” at least twice, then leave it in the “OFF” position. B
3. Wait 10 seconds.
4. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
AT
5. Does A/T CHECK indicator lamp come on for about 2 seconds?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2. D
No >> GO TO AT-210, "A/T CHECK Indicator Lamp does not come on" .

2. JUDGEMENT PROCEDURE E
NOTE:
After turning ignition switch “ON” (at step 6), perform within 2 seconds (while A/T CHECK indicator lamp come
on.). F
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Push shift lock release button.
3. Move selector lever from “P” to “D” position. G
4. Release accelerator pedal. (Set the closed throttle position signal “ON”.)
5. Depress brake pedal. (Stop lamp switch signal “ON”.)
6. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) H
7. Move the selector lever to the “N” position and release brake pedal. (Stop lamp switch signal “OFF”.)
8. Move the selector lever to “D” position and depress brake pedal. (Stop lamp switch signal “ON”.)
I
9. Release brake pedal. (Stop lamp switch signal “OFF”.)
10. Depress accelerator pedal fully and release it.
J
>> GO TO 3.

3. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE K

Check A/T CHECK indicator lamp. Refer to AT-82, "Judgement self-diagnosis code" .
If the system does not go into self-diagnostics, refer to AT-229, "TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate" .
L
>> DIAGNOSIS END

Revision: August 2004 AT-81 2005 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Judgement self-diagnosis code

When a malfunction is detected, the malfunction route is indicated by longer illumination of the indicator lamp.

SCIA2758E

Erase self-diagnosis
● In order to make it easier to find the cause of hard-to-duplicate malfunctions, malfunction information is
stored into the control unit as necessary during use by the user. This memory is not erased no matter how
many times the ignition switch is turned ON and OFF.
● However, this information is erased by turning ignition switch “OFF” after executing self-diagnostics or by
erasing the memory using the CONSULT-II.

Revision: August 2004 AT-82 2005 Maxima

 DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE

DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE PFP:23710

A
Description ECS00A1M

CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul-
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent malfunction detection ability. B
Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links
with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are con-
nected with 2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission
with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. AT

On Board Diagnosis Logic ECS00A1N

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. D

● Diagnostic trouble code “CAN COMM CIRCUIT” with CONSULT-II or U1000 without CONSULT-II is
detected when TCM cannot communicate to other control units.
E
Possible Cause ECS00A1O

Harness or connectors
(CAN communication line is open or shorted.) F
DTC Confirmation Procedure ECS00A1P

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” G
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
H
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II.
I
3. Start engine.
4. Drive vehicle and maintain the following condition for at least 6
seconds. J
SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position
5. If DTC is detected, go to AT-85, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
K

BCIA0030E

WITH GST L
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”.

Revision: August 2004 AT-83 2005 Maxima

 DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE

Wiring Diagram — AT — CAN ECS00A1Q

BCWA0265E

Revision: August 2004 AT-84 2005 Maxima

 DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE

TCM terminals and data are reference value.

Wire A
Terminal Item Condition Data (Approx.)
color
3 L CAN H – –
4 P CAN L – – B

Diagnostic Procedure ECS00A1R

1. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT AT

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and start engine. D
2. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for "A/T" with CONSULT-
II.
Is any malfunction of the "CAN COMM CIRCUIT" indicated? E
Yes >> Print out CONSULT-II screen, GO TO LAN section.
Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
No >> INSPECTION END
F

G
SCIA2818E

Revision: August 2004 AT-85 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR

DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR PFP:24814

Description ECS00A1S

The vehicle speed sensor·MTR signal is transmitted from unified meter and A/C amp. to TCM by CAN commu-
nication line. The signal functions as an auxiliary device to the revolution sensor when it is malfunctioning. The
TCM will then use the vehicle speed sensor·MTR signal.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ECS00A1T

● This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “VEH SPD SE/CIR-MTR” with CONSULT-II or 15th judgement flicker without
CONSULT-II is detected when TCM does not receive the proper vehicle speed sensor MTR signal (input
by CAN communication) from unified meter and A/C amp.
Possible Cause ECS00A1U

● Harness or connectors
(The signal circuit is open or shorted.)
● Unified meter and A/C amp.
● ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
● Wheel sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure ECS00A1V

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“A/T” with CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine.
3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 5
consecutive seconds.
VHCL/S SE-A/T: 30 km/h (17 MPH) or more
ACCELE ANGLE: 10 % or less
4. If DTC is detected, go to AT-87, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

BCIA0030E

Revision: August 2004 AT-86 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR

Diagnostic Procedure ECS00A1W

1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS A

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine. B
2. Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II.
3. Drive vehicle, and then make sure that the values of “VHCL/S
SE-A/T” and “VHCL/S SE-MTR” are same. AT
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
D
NG >> GO TO 2.

SCIA2922E
F
2. CHECK DTC WITH ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)
Refer to BRC-12, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" (with ABS), BRC-53, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" (with TCS/ABS) G
or BRC-96, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" (with VDC/TCS/ABS).
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. H
NG >> If NG, recheck pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.

3. CHECK DTC WITH UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP. I

Refer to DI-5, "COMBINATION METERS" .
OK or NG
J
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> If NG, recheck pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.

4. CHECK DTC K

Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-86, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .

OK or NG L
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 5.

5. CHECK TCM M

1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-71, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: August 2004 AT-87 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0613 TCM PROCESSOR

DTC P0613 TCM PROCESSOR PFP:31036

Description ECS00A1X

The TCM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal

input and output and for power supply. The TCM controls the A/T.

SCIA2820E

On Board Diagnosis Logic ECS00A1Y

● This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “TCM PROCESSOR” with CONSULT-II is detected when TCM processor is mal-
functioning.
Possible Cause ECS00A1Z

TCM
DTC Confirmation Procedure ECS00A20

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine.
4. Run engine for at least 2 consecutive seconds at idle speed.
5. If DTC is detected, go to AT-89, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

BCIA0030E

Revision: August 2004 AT-88 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0613 TCM PROCESSOR

Diagnostic Procedure ECS00A21

1. CHECK DTC A

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) B
2. Select “A/T” with “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode in CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “ERASE”.
AT
4. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
5. Perform DTC confirmation procedure, AT-88, "DTC Confirmation
Procedure" .
D
Is the “TCM PROCESSOR” displayed again?
YES >> Replace TCM.
NO >> INSPECTION END E
BCIA0031E

Revision: August 2004 AT-89 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH

DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH PFP:32006

Description ECS00A22

● The park/neutral position (PNP) switch includes a transmission position switch.

● The transmission range switch detects the selector lever position and sends a signal to the TCM.
● TCM judges the selector lever position by the park/neutral position (PNP) switch signal.
Selector lever PNP switch A PNP switch B PNP switch C PNP switch PA PNP switch PN
P ON OFF OFF ON ON
R ON ON OFF OFF OFF
N OFF ON OFF ON ON
D OFF ON ON OFF OFF

On Board Diagnosis Logic ECS00A23

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “PNP SW/CIRC” with CONSULT-II or P0705 without CONSULT-II is detected
when PNP switch signals input with impossible pattern.
Possible Cause ECS00A24

● Harness or connectors
[The park/neutral position (PNP) switch and TCM circuit is open or shorted.]
● Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
DTC Confirmation Procedure ECS00A25

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II.
3. Move selector lever to each position.
SLCT LVR POSI: “P”, “R”, “N” or “D” position
4. Wait for at least 5 consecutive seconds at each position.
5. If DTC is detected, go to AT-92, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

BCIA0030E

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.

Revision: August 2004 AT-90 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH

Wiring Diagram — AT — PNP/SW ECS00A26

AT

BCWA0266E

Revision: August 2004 AT-91 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH

TCM terminals and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Wire
Terminal Item Condition Data (Approx.)
color
Selector lever: “P” and “R” position 0V
24 O/L PNP switch A
Other than the above Battery voltage
Selector lever: “R”, “N”, “D” and manual mode position 0V
31 BR PNP switch B
Other than the above Battery voltage
Selector lever: “D” and manual mode position 0V
32 P/B PNP switch C
Other than the above Battery voltage
Selector lever: “P” and “N” position Battery voltage
33 LG PNP switch PN
Other than the above 0V
Selector lever: “P” and “N” position 0V
43 V/W PNP switch PA
Other than the above Battery voltage

Diagnostic Procedure ECS00A27

1. CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Move selector lever to “P”, “N”, “R” and “D” position and check
the value of “PNP SW A”, “PNP SW B”, “PNP SW C”, “PNP SW
PA” and “PNP SW PN”.
Selector “PNP SW “PNP SW “PNP SW “PNP SW “PNP SW
lever A” B” C” PA” PN”
P ON OFF OFF ON ON
R ON ON OFF OFF OFF
SCIA2823E
N OFF ON OFF ON ON
D OFF ON ON OFF OFF

Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
2. Move selector lever to “P“, “R”, “N”, or “D” position and check
voltage between the TCM connector terminals and ground.
Connector No. F57
Selector Terminal (Wire color)
lever
24 (O/L) - 31 (BR) - 32 (P/B) - 33 (LG) - 43 (V/W) -
Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground
Battery Battery Battery
P 0V 0V
voltage voltage voltage
SCIA2826E
Battery Battery
R 0V 0V 0V
voltage voltage
Battery Battery Battery
N 0V 0V
voltage voltage voltage
Battery Battery
D 0V 0V 0V
voltage voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 2.

Revision: August 2004 AT-92 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH

2. CHECK PNP SWITCH POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT A

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect the PNP switch connector.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) B
4. Check voltage between PNP switch connector terminals 2, 5
and ground.
AT
Connector Terminal (Wire color) Voltage
2 (O) - Ground
F29 Battery voltage
5 (G) - Ground D
5. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
6. Check voltage between PNP switch connector terminals 2, 5
and ground. E
SCIA2869E

Connector Terminal (Wire color) Voltage

2 (O) - Ground F
F29 0V
5 (G) - Ground
7. If OK, check harness for short-circuit to ground or power source.
G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Check the following. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts.
H
● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and PNP switch

● Ignition switch and fuse

Refer to PG-3, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
I
3. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND PNP SWITCH
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. J
2. Disconnect the TCM connector and PNP switch connector.
3. Check continuity between TCM connector terminals 24, 31, 32,
43 and ground. K

Terminal (Wire
Connector Condition Continuity
color)
L
Selector lever: “P” and “R” position Yes
24 (O/L) - Ground
Other than the above No
Selector lever: “R”, “N”, “D” and M
Yes SCIA2827E

31 (BR) - Ground manual mode position

Other than the above No
F57
Selector lever: “D” and manual
Yes
32 (P/B) - Ground mode position
Other than the above No
Selector lever: “P” and “N” position Yes
43 (V/W) - Ground
Other than the above No

4. If OK, check the following.

– Harness for short-circuit to ground or power source.
– Open or short-circuit in the harness between unified meter and A/C auto amp. and TCM.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.

Revision: August 2004 AT-93 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH

4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

Check the following.
● Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and PNP switch A, B, C, PA.
● Open or short-circuit in the harness for ground of PNP switch.
● PNP switch. Refer to AT-94, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

5. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-90, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 6.

6. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-71, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Component Inspection ECS00A28

PNP SWITCH
1. Check continuity between PNP switch terminals while moving selector lever. Refer to the following table.

SCIA2825E

2. If NG, check again with control cable disconnected. (Refer to Step 1 above.)
3. If OK on step 2, adjust control cable. Refer to AT-240, "Control Cable Adjustment" .
4. If NG on step 2, remove park/neutral position (PNP) switch from A/T and check continuity of park/neutral
position (PNP) switch terminals. (Refer to step 1 above.)
5. If OK on step 4, adjust park/neutral position (PNP) switch. Refer to AT-238, "Park/Neutral Position (PNP)
Switch Adjustment" .
6. If NG on step 4, replace park/neutral position (PNP) switch.

Revision: August 2004 AT-94 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT

DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT PFP:31940

A
Description ECS00A29

The A/T fluid temperature sensor detects the A/T fluid temperature and sends a signal to the TCM.
B
On Board Diagnosis Logic ECS00A2A

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC” with CONSULT-II or P0710 without CONSULT-II is AT
detected under the following conditions.
– When normal voltage not applied to ATF temperature sensor due to open, short, and so on.
– When during running, the ATF temperature sensor signal voltage is excessively high or low. D
Possible Cause ECS00A2B

● Harness or connectors E
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
● A/T fluid temperature sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure ECS00A2C F
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. G
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
H
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine.
I
4. Warm up engine so that engine coolant temperature is more
than 50°C (122°F).
COOLAN TEMP: More than 50°C (122°F)
J
5. Maintain the following conditions for at least 16 minutes (Total).
(It is not necessary to drive vehicle.)
COOLAN TEMP: More than 50°C (122°F)
SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position K
BCIA0030E
6. If DTC is detected, go to AT-97, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST L
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.

Revision: August 2004 AT-95 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT

Wiring Diagram — AT — FTS ECS00A2D

BCWA0267E

Revision: August 2004 AT-96 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT

TCM terminals and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Wire Data (Approx.) A
Terminal Item Condition
color
When ATF temperature 0°C (32°F) 4.0V 9.8 kΩ

Fluid temperature When ATF temperature 20°C (68°F) 3.0V 4.2 kΩ B

41 R/Y
sensor When ATF temperature 80°C (176°F) 0.8V .54 kΩ
When ATF temperature 100°C (212°F) 0.5V .31 kΩ
AT
Fluid temperature
42 LG Always 0V
sensor ground

Diagnostic Procedure ECS00A2E D

1. CHECK FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II E
1. Start engine.
2. Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II.
3. Read out the value of “FLUID TEMP SE”. F

Item name Condition Display value (Approx.)

0°C (32°F) 4.0V G
20°C (68°F) 3.0V
Fluid temperature sensor
80°C (176°F) 0.8V
100°C (212°F) 0.5V
H

SCIA2870E
I

Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine. J
2. Check voltage between TCM connector terminals 41 and 42
while warming up A/T. Refer to AT-96, "Wiring Diagram — AT —
FTS" . K

Connector Terminal (Wire color) Temperature Voltage (Approx.)

0°C (32°F) 4.0V L
20°C (68°F) 3.0V
F57 41 (R/Y) - 42 (LG) (ground)
80°C (176°F) 0.8V
100°C (212°F) 0.5V
M

3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. SCIA2871E

4. Disconnect the TCM connector.

5. Check if there is continuity between the connector terminal and ground.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 2.

Revision: August 2004 AT-97 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT

2. CHECK FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect the TCM connector.
3. Check resistance between terminals 41 and 42.
Resistance
Connector Terminal (Wire color) Temperature
(Approx.)
0°C (32°F) 9.8 kΩ
20°C (68°F) 4.2 kΩ
F57 41 (R/Y) - 42 (LG) (ground)
80°C (176°F) 0.54 kΩ
100°C (212°F) 0.31 kΩ

4. Check if there is continuity between the connector terminal and

ground. SCIA2872E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 3.

3. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY WITH A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect terminal cord assembly harness connector.
3. Check resistance between terminals 4 and 8.
Connector Terminal Temperature Resistance (Approx.)
0°C (32°F) 9.8 kΩ
20°C (68°F) 4.2 kΩ
F30 4-8
80°C (176°F) 0.54 kΩ
100°C (212°F) 0.31 kΩ
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
SCIA2873E
NG >> GO TO 5.

4. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY

Check the following.
● Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and terminal cord assembly.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: August 2004 AT-98 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT

5. CHECK A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR A

1. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-241, "Side cover" .
2. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor.
3. Check resistance between terminals 4 and 8. B

Connector Terminal Temperature Resistance

10°C (50°F) 5.80 - 7.09kΩ AT
F30 4-8
110°C (230°F) 0.23 - 0.26kΩ
OK or NG
D
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Repair or replace transmission wire. Refer to AT-241,
"Terminal cord assembly" .
E
WCIA0448E

6. CHECK DTC
F
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-95, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END G
NG >> GO TO 7.

7. CHECK TCM H
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-71, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG I
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
J
Component Inspection ECS00A2F

A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR

1. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-241, "Side cover" . K
2. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor.
3. Check resistance between terminals 4 and 8.
L
Connector Terminal Temperature Resistance
10°C (50°F) 5.80 - 7.09kΩ
F30 4-8
110°C (230°F) 0.23 - 0.26kΩ M
4. If NG, repair and replace transmission wire. Refer to AT-241,
"Terminal cord assembly" .

WCIA0448E

Revision: August 2004 AT-99 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0711 FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR PERFORMANCE

DTC P0711 FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR PERFORMANCE PFP:31940

Description ECS00A2G

The A/T fluid temperature sensor detects the A/T fluid temperature and sends a signal to the TCM.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ECS00A2H

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “FLUID TEMP SEN” with CONSULT-II or P0711 without CONSULT-II is detected
when ATF temperature signal does not change.
Possible Cause ECS00A2I

● Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
● A/T fluid temperature sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure ECS00A2J

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine.
4. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least
15 minutes (Total). (It is not necessary to maintain continuously.)
VHCL SPEED SE-A/T: 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more
SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position
5. If DTC is detected, go to AT-102, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

BCIA0030E

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.

Revision: August 2004 AT-100 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0711 FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR PERFORMANCE

Wiring Diagram — AT — FTSP ECS00A2K

AT

BCWA0268E

Revision: August 2004 AT-101 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0711 FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR PERFORMANCE

TCM terminals and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Wire
Terminal Item Condition Data (Approx.)
color
When ATF temperature 0°C (32°F) 4.0V 9.8 kΩ

Fluid temperature When ATF temperature 20°C (68°F) 3.0V 4.2 kΩ

41 R/Y
sensor When ATF temperature 80°C (176°F) 0.8V .54 kΩ
When ATF temperature 100°C (212°F) 0.5V .31 kΩ
Fluid temperature
42 LG Always 0V
sensor ground

Diagnostic Procedure ECS00A2L

1. CHECK FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II.
3. Read out the value of “FLUID TEMP SE”.
Item name Condition Display value (Approx.)
0°C (32°F) 4.0V
20°C (68°F) 3.0V
Fluid temperature sensor
80°C (176°F) 0.8V
100°C (212°F) 0.5V

SCIA2870E

Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Check voltage between TCM connector terminals 41 and 42
while warming up A/T. Refer to AT-101, "Wiring Diagram — AT
— FTSP" .
Connector Terminal (Wire color) Temperature Voltage (Approx.)
0°C (32°F) 4.0V
20°C (68°F) 3.0V
F57 41 (R/Y) - 42 (LG) (ground)
80°C (176°F) 0.8V
100°C (212°F) 0.5V
3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. SCIA2871E

4. Disconnect the TCM connector.

5. Check if there is continuity between the connector terminal and ground.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 2.

Revision: August 2004 AT-102 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0711 FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR PERFORMANCE

2. CHECK FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT A

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect the TCM connector.
3. Check resistance between terminals 41 and 42. B

Resistance
Connector Terminal (Wire color) Temperature
(Approx.)
AT
0°C (32°F) 9.8 kΩ
20°C (68°F) 4.2 kΩ
F57 41 (R/Y) - 42 (LG) (ground)
80°C (176°F) 0.54 kΩ D
100°C (212°F) 0.31 kΩ

4. Check if there is continuity between the connector terminal and

E
ground. SCIA2872E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
F
NG >> GO TO 3.

3. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY WITH A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR

G
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect terminal cord assembly harness connector.
3. Check resistance between terminals 4 and 8. H

Connector Terminal Temperature Resistance (Approx.)

0°C (32°F) 9.8 kΩ I
20°C (68°F) 4.2 kΩ
F30 4-8
80°C (176°F) 0.54 kΩ
100°C (212°F) 0.31 kΩ J

4. Reinstall any part removed.

OK or NG
SCIA2873E K
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 5.

4. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY L

Check the following.

● Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and terminal cord assembly. M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: August 2004 AT-103 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0711 FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR PERFORMANCE

5. CHECK A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR

1. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-241, "Side cover" .
2. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor.
3. Check resistance between terminals 4 and 8.
Connector Terminal) Temperature Resistance
10°C (50°F) 5.80 - 7.09kΩ
F30 4-8
110°C (230°F) 0.23 - 0.26kΩ
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Repair or replace transmission wire. Refer to AT-241,
"Terminal cord assembly" .
WCIA0448E

6. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-100, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 7.

7. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-71, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Component Inspection ECS00A2M

A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR

1. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-241, "Side cover" .
2. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor.
3. Check resistance between terminals 4 and 8.
Connector Terminal) Temperature Resistance
10°C (50°F) 5.80 - 7.09kΩ
F30 4-8
110°C (230°F) 0.23 - 0.26kΩ

4. If NG, repair or replace transmission wire. Refer to AT-241, "Ter-

minal cord assembly" .

WCIA0448E

Revision: August 2004 AT-104 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0717 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR CIRCUIT

DTC P0717 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR CIRCUIT PFP:31935

A
Description ECS00A2N

● The turbine revolution sensor detects forward clutch drum rpm

(revolutions per minute). It is located on the input side of the B
automatic transaxle. The revolution sensor is located on the out-
put side of the automatic transaxle. With the two sensors, input
and output rpms are accurately detected. The result is optimal
shift timing during deceleration and improved shifting. AT
● Hall IC is installed in turbine revolution sensor, it itself handles in
pulse of rectangular wave signal and transmits it to TCM due to
hall effect. TCM recognizes the pulse with input rpm speed. Size D
of output doesn't depend on a rotation number and is fixed.
SCIA2830E

E
On Board Diagnosis Logic ECS00A2O

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “TURBINE SENSOR” with CONSULT-II or P0717 without CONSULT-II is F
detected under the following conditions.
– When signal from turbine revolution sensor does not input due to open, short, and so on.
– When unexpected signal input during running. G
Possible Cause ECS00A2P

● Harness or connectors H
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
● Turbine revolution sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure ECS00A2Q I
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
J
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. K
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
L
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine.
4. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 1 M
consecutive minute.
FLUID TEMP: More than 20°C (68°F)
VHCL/S SE-A/T: 70 km/h (43 MPH) or more
SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position
GEAR: Except 1st position
5. If DTC is detected, go to AT-107, "Diagnostic Procedure" . BCIA0030E

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.

Revision: August 2004 AT-105 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0717 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR CIRCUIT

Wiring Diagram — AT — TRSC ECS00A2R

BCWA0269E

Revision: August 2004 AT-106 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0717 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR CIRCUIT

TCM terminals and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Wire A
Terminal Item Condition Data (Approx.)
color

When turning ignition switch ON. Battery voltage B

Turbine revolution
23 G sensor power sup-
ply
When turning ignition switch OFF. 0V AT

Turbine revolution
D
30 R When moving at 20 km/h (12 MPH) in 1st gear. 371Hz
sensor

E
Diagnostic Procedure ECS00A2S

1. CHECK TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR CIRCUIT

F
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II. G
3. Drive vehicle and read out the value of “TURBINE REV”.
Monitor item Condition Specification H
Approximately matches the
TURBINE REV During driving (lock-up ON)
engine speed.
I

SCIA2924E

K
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start the engine.
2. Check pulse between TCM connector terminals 23 and 30. L
Data
Connector Terminal (Wire color) Condition
(Approx.)
When moving at 20 km/h (12 M
F57 23 (G) - 30 (R) (ground) 371 Hz
MPH) in 1st gear.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.

SCIA2925E

2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

Check the following.
● Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and turbine revolution sensor.
● Turbine revolution sensor. Refer to AT-108, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: August 2004 AT-107 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0717 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR CIRCUIT

3. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-105, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 4.

4. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-71, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Component Inspection ECS00A2T

TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR

1. Remove turbine revolution sensor.
2. Connect 12V power supply and 100 Ω resistance to the termi-
nal. (Do not mistake polarity)
3. Inspect the voltage of HIGH and LOW signal by shaking mag-
netic body from side to side at turbine revolution sensor tip [gap
is within 5 mm (0.20 in)].
CAUTION:
Make sure to shake direction from bolt hole to sensor-self
when shaking magnetic body. If not, voltage value cannot
change.
Signal Voltage (Approx.) SCIA2927E

HIGH 1.2 - 1.6V

LOW 0.4 - 0.8V
4. If NG, replace turbine revolution sensor.

Revision: August 2004 AT-108 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0722 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) CIRCUIT

DTC P0722 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) CIRCUIT

PFP:31935 A
Description ECS00A2U

● The revolution sensor detects the revolution of the idler gear

B
parking pawl lock gear and emits a pulse signal. The pulse sig-
nal is sent to the TCM which converts it into vehicle speed.
● Hall IC is installed in revolution sensor, it itself handles in pulse
of rectangular wave signal and transmits it to TCM due to hall AT
effect. TCM recognizes the pulse with vehicle speed. Size of
output doesn't depend on a rotation number and is fixed.
D

SCIA2830E
E
On Board Diagnosis Logic ECS00A2V

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

F
● Diagnostic trouble code “VHCL SPEED SEN-A/T” with CONSULT-II or P0722 without CONSULT-II is
detected under the following conditions.
– When signal from revolution sensor does not input due to open, short, and so on.
G
– When unexpected signal input during running.
Possible Cause ECS00A2W

H
● Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
● Revolution sensor
I
DTC Confirmation Procedure ECS00A2X

CAUTION:
● Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. J
● Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” K
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II L
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
M
3. Start engine.
4. Drive vehicle and check for an increase of “VHCL/S SE-A/T”
value in response to “VHCL/S SE-MTR” value.
If the check result is NG, go to AT-111, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If the check result is OK, go to following step.
5. Maintain the following conditions for at least 2 consecutive min-
utes.
FLUID TEMP: More than 20°C (68°F) BCIA0030E
VHCL/S SE-A/T: 70 km/h (43 MPH) or more
SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position
If the check result is NG, go to AT-111, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.

Revision: August 2004 AT-109 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0722 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) CIRCUIT

Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSATC ECS00A2Y

BCWA0270E

Revision: August 2004 AT-110 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0722 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) CIRCUIT

TCM terminals and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Wire A
Terminal Item Condition Data (Approx.)
color

When turning ignition switch ON. Battery voltage B

Revolution sensor
22 L
power supply
When turning ignition switch OFF. 0V AT

D
29 B/W Revolution sensor When moving at 20 km/h (12 MPH) in 1st gear. 119Hz

E
Diagnostic Procedure ECS00A2Z

1. CHECK REVOLUTION SENSOR CIRCUIT

F
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II. G
3. Drive vehicle and read out the value of “VHCL/S SE-AT”.
Monitor item Condition Specification H
Approximately matches the
VHCL/S SE-AT During driving
speedometer reading.
I

SCIA2922E

K
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start the engine.
2. Check pulse between TCM connector terminals 22 and 29. L
Data
Connector Terminal (Wire color) Condition
(Approx.)
When moving at 20 km/h M
F57 22 (L) - 29 (B/W) (ground) 119 Hz
(12 MPH) in 1st gear.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.

SCIA2928E

2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

Check the following.
● Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and revolution sensor.
● Revolution sensor. Refer to AT-112, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: August 2004 AT-111 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0722 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) CIRCUIT

3. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-109, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 4.

4. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-71, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Component Inspection ECS00A30

REVOLUTION SENSOR
1. Remove revolution sensor.
2. Connect 12V power supply and 100 Ω resistance to the termi-
nal. (Do not mistake polarity)
3. Inspect the voltage of HIGH and LOW signal by shaking mag-
netic body from side to side at revolution sensor tip [gap is within
5mm (0.20 in)].
CAUTION:
Make sure to shake direction from bolt hole to sensor-self
when shaking magnetic body. If not, voltage value cannot
change.
Signal Voltage (Approx.) SCIA2927E

HIGH 1.2 - 1.6V

LOW 0.4 - 0.8V
4. If NG, replace revolution sensor.

Revision: August 2004 AT-112 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0726 ENGINE SPEED INPUT CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE

DTC P0726 ENGINE SPEED INPUT CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE PFP:31036

A
Description ECS00A31

The engine speed signal is sent from the ECM to the TCM.
B
On Board Diagnosis Logic ECS00A32

● This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “ENG SPD INP PERFOR” with CONSULT-II or 14th judgement flicker without AT
CONSULT-II is detected when malfunction is detected in engine speed signal, actual engine torque signal
or torque reduction signal that is output from ECM through CAN communication.
Possible Cause ECS00A33 D
● Harness or connectors
(The signal circuit is open or shorted.)
● ECM E

DTC Confirmation Procedure ECS00A34

CAUTION: F
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” G
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II H
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “A/T” with “DATA MONI-
TOR” mode in CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine. I
3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least
10 consecutive seconds.
VHCL/S SE-A/T: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more J
ACCELE ANGLE: More than 10 %
SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position
4. If DTC is detected, go to AT-113, "Diagnostic Procedure" . K
BCIA0030E

Diagnostic Procedure ECS00A35

L
1. CHECK DTC WITH ECM
With CONSULT-II
M
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “ENGINE” with “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode in CON-
SULT-II. Refer to AT-74, "CONSULT-II Function (TCM)" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Check the DTC detected item, go to AT-5, "INDEX FOR
DTC" .
● If CAN communication line is detected, go to AT-83,
"DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .

BCIA0030E

Revision: August 2004 AT-113 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0726 ENGINE SPEED INPUT CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE

2. CHECK DTC WITH TCM

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II.
3. While monitoring “ENGINE SPEED”, check for engine speed
change corresponding to “ACCELE ANGLE”.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Check the ignition signal circuit.
● Refer to EC-666, "IGNITION SIGNAL" .

SCIA2929E

3. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-113, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 4.

4. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-71, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: August 2004 AT-114 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0731 A/T 1ST GEAR FUNCTION

DTC P0731 A/T 1ST GEAR FUNCTION PFP:31940

A
Description ECS00A36

● This malfunction will not be detected while the A/T CHECK indicator lamp is indicating another self-diag-
nosis malfunction. B
● This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into first gear position as instructed by the TCM.
This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such
as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc. AT
Shift solenoid valve
Gear position
A B C D E
D
D ON (Closed) ON (Open) ON (Open) OFF (Open) OFF (Closed)
1st
M1 ON (Closed) ON (Open) ON (Open) OFF (Open) ON (Open)

On Board Diagnosis Logic ECS00A37

E

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “A/T 1ST GR FNCTN” with CONSULT-II or P0731 without CONSULT-II is
F
detected when A/T cannot be shifted to the 1st gear position even if electrical circuit is good.
Possible Cause ECS00A38

● Shift solenoid valve A G

(Off stick.)
● 2nd brake
● 2nd coast brake H
● One-way clutch No.1
● One-way clutch No.2
I
● Hydraulic control circuit
DTC Confirmation Procedure ECS00A39

J
CAUTION:
● Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
● Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer.
K
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. L
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in
CONSULT-II. M
2. Make sure that ATF temperature is within the range below.
FLUID TEMP: More than 20°C (68°F)
If out of range, drive the vehicle to warm up the fluid.
3. Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following conditions for at
least 12 consecutive seconds.
SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position
GEAR: 1st position
[Vehicle speed and accelerator angle: 1st gear position
retainable condition. (Refer to AT-312, "VEHICLE SPEED BCIA0030E

WHEN SHIFTING GEARS" .)]

Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving
conditions required for this test.
4. If DTC is detected, go to AT-117, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.

Revision: August 2004 AT-115 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0731 A/T 1ST GEAR FUNCTION

Wiring Diagram — AT — 1STSIG ECS00A3A

BCWA0271E

Revision: August 2004 AT-116 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0731 A/T 1ST GEAR FUNCTION

TCM terminal and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Wire A
Terminal Item Condition Data (Approx.)
color
When shift solenoid valve A operates.
Battery voltage
(When driving in 1st gear.)
Shift solenoid B
46 W/G
valve A
When shift solenoid valve A does not operate. 0V

AT
Diagnostic Procedure ECS00A3B

1. CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A CIRCUIT

D
Perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for DTC P0750. Refer to AT-151, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. E
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

2. CHECK MALFUNCTIONING ITEM F

1. Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-241, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disassembly A/T. Refer to AT-252, "DISASSEMBLY" .
G
3. Check the following item:
– 2nd brake. Refer to AT-272, "Oil Pump, 2nd Coast Brake & 2nd Brake" .
– 2nd coast brake. Refer to AT-272, "Oil Pump, 2nd Coast Brake & 2nd Brake" , AT-278, "One-Way Clutch H
Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1" .
– One-way clutch No.1. Refer to AT-278, "One-Way Clutch Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake
Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1" .
I
– One-way clutch No.2. Refer to AT-252, "DISASSEMBLY" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. J
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

3. CHECK DTC K
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-115, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END L
NG >> Replace control valve assembly. Refer to AT-241, "Control Valve Assembly" .

Revision: August 2004 AT-117 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0732 A/T 2ND GEAR FUNCTION

DTC P0732 A/T 2ND GEAR FUNCTION PFP:31940

Description ECS00A3C

● This malfunction will not be detected while the A/T CHECK indicator lamp is indicating another self-diag-
nosis malfunction.
● This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into second gear position as instructed by the
TCM. This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction
such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc.
Shift solenoid valve
Gear position
A B C D E
D OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) ON (Open) OFF (Open) OFF (Closed)
2nd
M2 OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) ON (Open) OFF (Open) OFF (Closed)

On Board Diagnosis Logic ECS00A3D

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “A/T 2ND GR FNCTN” with CONSULT-II or P0732 without CONSULT-II is
detected when A/T cannot be shifted to the 2nd gear position even if electrical circuit is good.
Possible Cause ECS00A3E

● Shift solenoid valve A

(On stick.)
● Shift solenoid valve B
(On stick.)
● Shift solenoid valve C
(Off stick.)
● Shift solenoid valve D
(On stick.)
● Pressure control solenoid valve A
(On stick.)
● Pressure control solenoid valve C
(On stick.)
● U/D brake
● 2nd coast brake
● 2nd brake
● One-way clutch No.1
● One-way clutch No.2
● B5 brake
● Hydraulic control circuit
DTC Confirmation Procedure ECS00A3F

CAUTION:
● Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
● Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.

Revision: August 2004 AT-118 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0732 A/T 2ND GEAR FUNCTION

WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in A
CONSULT-II.
2. Make sure that ATF temperature is within the range below.
FLUID TEMP: More than 20°C (68°F) B
If out of range, drive the vehicle to warm up the fluid.
3. Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following conditions for at
least 12 consecutive seconds. AT
SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position
GEAR: 2nd position
[Vehicle speed and accelerator angle: 2nd gear position
retainable condition. (Refer to AT-312, "VEHICLE SPEED BCIA0030E
D
WHEN SHIFTING GEARS" .)]
Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving
conditions required for this test. E
4. If DTC is detected, go to AT-122, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST
F
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.

Revision: August 2004 AT-119 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0732 A/T 2ND GEAR FUNCTION

Wiring Diagram — AT — 2NDSIG ECS00A3G

BCWA0272E

Revision: August 2004 AT-120 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0732 A/T 2ND GEAR FUNCTION

AT

BCWA0273E

Revision: August 2004 AT-121 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0732 A/T 2ND GEAR FUNCTION

TCM terminals and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Wire
Terminal Item Condition Data (Approx.)
color
When shift solenoid valve B operates.
Shift solenoid Battery voltage
25 G/R (When driving in 1st or 5th gear.)
valve B
When shift solenoid valve B does not operate. 0V
When shift solenoid valve D operates.
Shift solenoid Battery voltage
26 V/W (When driving in 3rd, 4th or 5th gear.)
valve D
When shift solenoid valve D does not operate. 0V
Pressure control
When engine is running with idle speed and set-
28 W solenoid valve C 0V
ting selector lever to “P” position.
ground
Pressure control When engine is running with idle speed and set-
35 L/Y 300Hz
solenoid valve A ting selector lever to “P” position.
When shift solenoid valve C operates.
Battery voltage
(When driving in 1st, 2nd, 3rd or reverse gear.)
Shift solenoid
37 R/B
valve C
When shift solenoid valve C does not operate. 0V

Pressure control
When engine is running with idle speed and set-
40 L/G solenoid valve A 0V
ting selector lever to “P” position.
ground
Pressure control When engine is running with idle speed and set-
45 O 300Hz
solenoid valve C ting selector lever to “P” position.
When shift solenoid valve A operates.
Battery voltage
(When driving in 1st gear.)
Shift solenoid
46 W/G
valve A
When shift solenoid valve A does not operate. 0V

Diagnostic Procedure ECS00A3H

1. CHECK EACH SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT

Perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for the following DTCs.
● “DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A” (Refer to AT-151, "Diagnostic Procedure" .)
● “DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B” (Refer to AT-156, "Diagnostic Procedure" .)
● “DTC P0760 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C” (Refer to AT-161, "Diagnostic Procedure" .)
● “DTC P0765 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D” (Refer to AT-171, "Diagnostic Procedure" .)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

2. CHECK EACH PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT

Perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for the following DTCs.
● “DTC P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A” (Refer to AT-146, "Diagnostic Procedure" .)
● “DTC P0795 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C” (Refer to AT-190, "Diagnostic Procedure" .)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: August 2004 AT-122 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0732 A/T 2ND GEAR FUNCTION

3. CHECK MALFUNCTIONING ITEM A

1. Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-241, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disassembly A/T. Refer to AT-252, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check the following item: B
– U/D brake. Refer to AT-252, "DISASSEMBLY" .
– 2nd coast brake. Refer to AT-272, "Oil Pump, 2nd Coast Brake & 2nd Brake" , AT-278, "One-Way Clutch
Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1" . AT
– 2nd brake. Refer to AT-272, "Oil Pump, 2nd Coast Brake & 2nd Brake" .
– One-way clutch No.1. Refer to AT-278, "One-Way Clutch Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake
D
Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1" .
– One-way clutch No.2. Refer to AT-252, "DISASSEMBLY" .
– B5 brake. Refer to AT-280, "Transaxle Case Cover & B5 Brake" . E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. F
4. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-118, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . G
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Replace control valve assembly. Refer to AT-241, "Control Valve Assembly" . H

Revision: August 2004 AT-123 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0733 A/T 3RD GEAR FUNCTION

DTC P0733 A/T 3RD GEAR FUNCTION PFP:31940

Description ECS00A3I

● This malfunction will not be detected while the A/T CHECK indicator lamp is indicating another self-diag-
nosis malfunction.
● This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into third gear position as instructed by the TCM.
This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such
as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc.
Shift solenoid valve
Gear position
A B C D E
D OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) ON (Open) ON (Closed) OFF (Closed)
3rd
M3 OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) ON (Open) ON (Closed) OFF (Closed)

On Board Diagnosis Logic ECS00A3J

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “A/T 3RD GR FNCTN” with CONSULT-II or P0733 without CONSULT-II is
detected when A/T cannot be shifted to the 3rd gear position even if electrical circuit is good.
Possible Cause ECS00A3K

● Shift solenoid valve A

(On stick.)
● Shift solenoid valve B
(On stick.)
● Shift solenoid valve C
(Off stick.)
● Shift solenoid valve D
(Off stick.)
● Pressure control solenoid valve A
(On stick.)
● B5 brake
● U/D clutch
● U/D brake
● Hydraulic control circuit
DTC Confirmation Procedure ECS00A3L

CAUTION:
● Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
● Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in
CONSULT-II.
2. Make sure that ATF temperature is within the range below.
FLUID TEMP: More than 20°C (68°F)
If out of range, drive the vehicle to warm up the fluid.
3. Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following conditions for at
least 10 consecutive seconds.
SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position
GEAR: 3rd position

BCIA0030E

Revision: August 2004 AT-124 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0733 A/T 3RD GEAR FUNCTION

[Vehicle speed and accelerator angle: 3rd gear position retainable condition. (Refer to AT-312,
"VEHICLE SPEED WHEN SHIFTING GEARS" .)] A
Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving
conditions required for this test.
4. If DTC is detected, go to AT-128, "Diagnostic Procedure" . B
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
AT

Revision: August 2004 AT-125 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0733 A/T 3RD GEAR FUNCTION

Wiring Diagram — AT — 3RDSIG ECS00A3M

BCWA0274E

Revision: August 2004 AT-126 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0733 A/T 3RD GEAR FUNCTION

AT

BCWA0275E

Revision: August 2004 AT-127 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0733 A/T 3RD GEAR FUNCTION

TCM terminals and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Wire
Terminal Item Condition Data (Approx.)
color
When shift solenoid valve B operates.
Shift solenoid Battery voltage
25 G/R (When driving in 1st or 5th gear.)
valve B
When shift solenoid valve B does not operate. 0V
When shift solenoid valve D operates.
Shift solenoid Battery voltage
26 V/W (When driving in 3rd, 4th or 5th gear.)
valve D
When shift solenoid valve D does not operate. 0V

Pressure control When engine is running with idle speed and set-
35 L/Y 300Hz
solenoid valve A ting selector lever to “P” position.

When shift solenoid valve C operates.

Battery voltage
(When driving in 1st, 2nd, 3rd or reverse gear.)
Shift solenoid
37 R/B
valve C
When shift solenoid valve C does not operate. 0V

Pressure control
When engine is running with idle speed and set-
40 L/G solenoid valve A 0V
ting selector lever to “P” position.
ground

When shift solenoid valve A operates.

Battery voltage
(When driving in 1st gear.)
Shift solenoid
46 W/G
valve A
When shift solenoid valve A does not operate. 0V

Diagnostic Procedure ECS00A3N

1. CHECK EACH SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT

Perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for the following DTCs.
● “DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A” (Refer to AT-151, "Diagnostic Procedure" .)
● “DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B” (Refer to AT-156, "Diagnostic Procedure" .)
● “DTC P0760 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C” (Refer to AT-161, "Diagnostic Procedure" .)
● “DTC P0765 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D” (Refer to AT-171, "Diagnostic Procedure" .)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

2. CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A CIRCUIT

Perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for DTC P0745. Refer to AT-146, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: August 2004 AT-128 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0733 A/T 3RD GEAR FUNCTION

3. CHECK MALFUNCTIONING ITEM A

1. Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-241, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disassembly A/T. Refer to AT-252, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check the following item: B
– B5 brake. Refer to AT-280, "Transaxle Case Cover & B5 Brake" .
– U/D clutch. Refer to AT-252, "DISASSEMBLY" .
AT
– U/D brake. Refer to AT-252, "DISASSEMBLY" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. D
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

4. CHECK DTC E
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-124, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END F
NG >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-241, "Control Valve Assembly" .

Revision: August 2004 AT-129 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION

DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION PFP:31940

Description ECS00A3O

● This malfunction will not be detected while the A/T CHECK indicator lamp is indicating another self-diag-
nosis malfunction.
● This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into fourth gear position as instructed by the
TCM. This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction
such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc.
Shift solenoid valve
Gear position
A B C D E
D OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) OFF (Closed) ON (Closed) OFF (Closed)
4th
M4 OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) OFF (Closed) ON (Closed) OFF (Closed)

On Board Diagnosis Logic ECS00A3P

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “A/T 4TH GR FNCTN” with CONSULT-II or P0734 without CONSULT-II is
detected when A/T cannot be shifted to the 4th gear position even if electrical circuit is good.
Possible Cause ECS00A3Q

● Shift solenoid valve A

(On stick.)
● Shift solenoid valve B
(On stick.)
● Shift solenoid valve C
(On stick.)
● Pressure control solenoid valve A
(On stick.)
● Forward and direct clutch assembly
● U/D clutch
● U/D brake
● 2nd coast brake
● One-way clutch No.1
● Hydraulic control circuit
DTC Confirmation Procedure ECS00A3R

CAUTION:
● Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
● Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in
CONSULT-II.
2. Make sure that ATF temperature is within the range below.
FLUID TEMP: More than 20°C (68°F)
If out of range, drive the vehicle to warm up the fluid.
3. Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following conditions for at
least 10 consecutive seconds.
SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position
GEAR: 4th position

BCIA0030E

Revision: August 2004 AT-130 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION

[Vehicle speed and accelerator angle: 4th gear position retainable condition. (Refer to AT-312,
"VEHICLE SPEED WHEN SHIFTING GEARS" .)] A
Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving
conditions required for this test.
4. If DTC is detected, go to AT-133, "Diagnostic Procedure" . B
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
AT

Revision: August 2004 AT-131 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION

Wiring Diagram — AT — 4THSIG ECS00A3S

BCWA0276E

Revision: August 2004 AT-132 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION

TCM terminals and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Wire A
Terminal Item Condition Data (Approx.)
color
When shift solenoid valve B operates.
Battery voltage
(When driving in 1st or 5th gear.)
Shift solenoid B
25 G/R
valve B
When shift solenoid valve B does not operate. 0V

AT
Pressure control When engine is running with idle speed and set-
35 L/Y 300Hz
solenoid valve A ting selector lever to “P” position.
D
When shift solenoid valve C operates.
Battery voltage
(When driving in 1st, 2nd, 3rd or reverse gear.)
Shift solenoid
37 R/B
valve C E
When shift solenoid valve C does not operate. 0V

Pressure control F
When engine is running with idle speed and set-
40 L/G solenoid valve A 0V
ting selector lever to “P” position.
ground

When shift solenoid valve A operates.

Battery voltage G
(When driving in 1st gear.)
Shift solenoid
46 W/G
valve A
When shift solenoid valve A does not operate. 0V
H

Diagnostic Procedure ECS00A3T

1. CHECK EACH SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT I

Perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for the following DTCs.

● “DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A” (Refer to AT-151, "Diagnostic Procedure" .) J
● “DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B” (Refer to AT-156, "Diagnostic Procedure" .)
● “DTC P0760 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C” (Refer to AT-161, "Diagnostic Procedure" .)
OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
L
2. CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A CIRCUIT
Perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for DTC P0745. Refer to AT-146, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: August 2004 AT-133 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION

3. CHECK MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

1. Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-241, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disassembly A/T. Refer to AT-252, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check the following item:
– Forward and direct clutch assembly. Refer to AT-252, "DISASSEMBLY" .
– 2nd coast brake. Refer to AT-272, "Oil Pump, 2nd Coast Brake & 2nd Brake" , AT-278, "One-Way Clutch
Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1" .
– U/D brake. Refer to AT-252, "DISASSEMBLY" .
– U/D clutch. Refer to AT-252, "DISASSEMBLY" .
– One-way clutch No.1. Refer to AT-278, "One-Way Clutch Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake
Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

4. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-130, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-241, "Control Valve Assembly" .

Revision: August 2004 AT-134 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0735 A/T 5TH GEAR FUNCTION

DTC P0735 A/T 5TH GEAR FUNCTION PFP:31940

A
Description ECS00A3U

● This malfunction will not be detected while the A/T CHECK indicator lamp is indicating another self-diag-
nosis malfunction. B
● This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into fifth gear position as instructed by the TCM.
This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such
as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc. AT
Shift solenoid valve
Gear position
A B C D E
D
D OFF (Open) ON (Open) OFF (Closed) ON (Closed) OFF (Closed)
5th
M5 OFF (Open) ON (Open) OFF (Closed) ON (Closed) OFF (Closed)

On Board Diagnosis Logic ECS00A3V

E

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “A/T 5TH GR FNCTN” with CONSULT-II or P0735 without CONSULT-II is
F
detected when A/T cannot be shifted to the 5th gear position even if electrical circuit is good.
Possible Cause ECS00A3W

● Shift solenoid valve B G

(Off stick.)
● Shift solenoid valve C
(On stick.) H
● Shift solenoid valve E
(On stick.)
● Pressure control solenoid valve A I
(On stick.)
● Pressure control solenoid valve B
(On stick.) J
● Forward and direct clutch assembly
● Direct clutch
● 2no coast brake K
● One-way clutch No.1
● Hydraulic control circuit
L
DTC Confirmation Procedure ECS00A3X

CAUTION:
● Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. M
● Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.

Revision: August 2004 AT-135 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0735 A/T 5TH GEAR FUNCTION

WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with
CONSULT-II.
2. Make sure that ATF temperature is within the range below.
FLUID TEMP: More than 20°C (68°F)
If out of range, drive the vehicle to warm up the fluid.
3. Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following conditions for at
least 12 consecutive seconds.
SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position
GEAR: 5th position
[Vehicle speed and accelerator angle: 5th gear position
retainable condition. (Refer to AT-312, "VEHICLE SPEED BCIA0030E

WHEN SHIFTING GEARS" .)]

Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving
conditions required for this test.
4. If DTC is detected, go to AT-139, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.

Revision: August 2004 AT-136 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0735 A/T 5TH GEAR FUNCTION

Wiring Diagram — AT — 5THSIG ECS00A3Y

AT

BCWA0277E

Revision: August 2004 AT-137 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0735 A/T 5TH GEAR FUNCTION

BCWA0278E

Revision: August 2004 AT-138 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0735 A/T 5TH GEAR FUNCTION

TCM terminals and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Wire A
Terminal Item Condition Data (Approx.)
color

Pressure control
When engine is running with idle speed and set-
21 G/B solenoid valve B 0V B
ting selector lever to “P” position.
ground

When shift solenoid valve B operates.

Battery voltage
(When driving in 1st or 5th gear.) AT
Shift solenoid
25 G/R
valve B
When shift solenoid valve B does not operate. 0V
D
Pressure control When engine is running with idle speed and set-
35 L/Y 300Hz
solenoid valve A ting selector lever to “P” position.
Pressure control When engine is running with idle speed and set- E
36 O/B 300Hz
solenoid valve B ting selector lever to “P” position.
When shift solenoid valve C operates.
Battery voltage
(When driving in 1st, 2nd, 3rd or reverse gear.)
Shift solenoid F
37 R/B
valve C
When shift solenoid valve C does not operate. 0V

G
Pressure control
When engine is running with idle speed and set-
40 L/G solenoid valve A 0V
ting selector lever to “P” position.
ground
H
When shift solenoid valve E operates.
Battery voltage
(When driving in reverse gear.)
Shift solenoid
47 BR/Y
valve E I
When shift solenoid valve E does not operate. 0V

Diagnostic Procedure ECS00A3Z

J
1. CHECK EACH SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT
Perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for the following DTCs. K
● “DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B” (Refer to AT-156, "Diagnostic Procedure" .)
● “DTC P0760 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C” (Refer to AT-161, "Diagnostic Procedure" .)
● “DTC P0770 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E” (Refer to AT-176, "Diagnostic Procedure" .) L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. M

2. CHECK EACH PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT

Perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for the following DTCs.
● “DTC P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A” (Refer to AT-146, "Diagnostic Procedure" .)
● “DTC P0775 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B” (Refer to AT-181, "Diagnostic Procedure" .)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: August 2004 AT-139 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0735 A/T 5TH GEAR FUNCTION

3. CHECK MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

1. Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-241, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disassembly A/T. Refer to AT-252, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check the following item:
– Forward and direct clutch assembly. Refer to AT-252, "DISASSEMBLY" .
– 2nd brake. Refer to AT-272, "Oil Pump, 2nd Coast Brake & 2nd Brake" .
– One-way clutch No.1. Refer to AT-278, "One-Way Clutch Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake
Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

4. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-135, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-241, "Control Valve Assembly" .

Revision: August 2004 AT-140 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP)

DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP) PFP:31940

A
Description ECS00A40

● This malfunction will not be detected while the A/T CHECK indicator lamp is indicating another self-diag-
nosis malfunction. B
● This malfunction is detected when the torque converter clutch does not lock up as instructed by the TCM.
This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such
as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, malfunctioning oil pump or torque converter AT
clutch, etc.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ECS00A41

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. D

● Diagnostic trouble code “A/T TCC S/V FNCTN” with CONSULT-II or P0744 without CONSULT-II is
detected when A/T cannot perform lock-up even if electrical circuit is good.
E
Possible Cause ECS00A42

● Shift solenoid valve D

(Off stick.) F
● Pressure control solenoid valve C
(Off stick.)
● Torque converter clutch G
● Hydraulic control circuit
DTC Confirmation Procedure ECS00A43
H
CAUTION:
● Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
● Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer. I
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. J
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with K
CONSULT-II.
2. Make sure that ATF temperature is within the range below.
FLUID TEMP: More than 20°C (68°F) L
If out of range, drive the vehicle to warm up the fluid.
3. Accelerate vehicle to more than 100 km/h (62 MPH) and main-
tain the following conditions for at least 12 consecutive seconds.
M
SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position
GEAR: 5th position
SLIP REV: Less than 100 rpm
ACCELE ANGLE: More than 5 % BCIA0030E

LOCK-UP: ON (Refer to AT-313, "VEHICLE SPEED WHEN

PERFORMING AND RELEASING COMPLETE LOCK-UP" .)
[Vehicle speed: Constant speed of more than 100 km/h (62 MPH).]
Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving
conditions required for this test.
4. If DTC is detected, go to AT-143, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.

Revision: August 2004 AT-141 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP)

Wiring Diagram — AT — TCCSIG ECS00A44

BCWA0279E

Revision: August 2004 AT-142 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP)

TCM terminals and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Wire A
Terminal Item Condition Data (Approx.)
color
Pressure control
When engine is running with idle speed and set-
28 W solenoid valve C 0V
ting selector lever to “P” position. B
ground
Pressure control When engine is running with idle speed and set-
45 O 300Hz
solenoid valve C ting selector lever to “P” position.
AT
Diagnostic Procedure ECS00A45

1. CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D CIRCUIT

D
Perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for DTC P0765. Refer to AT-171, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. E
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

2. CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C CIRCUIT F

Perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for DTC P0795. Refer to AT-190, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
OK or NG
G
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

3. CHECK MALFUNCTIONING ITEM H

1. Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-241, "Control Valve Assembly" .

2. Disassembly A/T. Refer to AT-252, "DISASSEMBLY" . I
3. Check the following item:
– Torque converter clutch. Refer to AT-252, "DISASSEMBLY" .
OK or NG J
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
K
4. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-141, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
L
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-241, "Control Valve Assembly" .
M

Revision: August 2004 AT-143 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A (LINE PRESSURE)

DTC P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A (LINE PRESSURE)

PFP:31940

Description ECS00A46

● The pressure control solenoid valve A is normally high, 3-port

linear pressure control solenoid.
● The pressure control solenoid valve A regulates the oil pump
discharge pressure to suit the driving condition in response to a
signal sent from the TCM.

SCIA2831E

On Board Diagnosis Logic ECS00A47

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “PC SOL A(L/PRESS)” with CONSULT-II or P0745 without CONSULT-II is
detected under the following conditions.
– When normal voltage is not applied to solenoid due to open, short, and so on.
– When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value.
Possible Cause ECS00A48

● Harness or connectors
(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
● Pressure control solenoid valve A
DTC Confirmation Procedure ECS00A49

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine.
4. Run engine for at least 13 consecutive seconds at idle speed.
5. If DTC is detected, go to AT-146, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

BCIA0030E

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.

Revision: August 2004 AT-144 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A (LINE PRESSURE)

Wiring Diagram — AT — PC/A ECS00A4A

AT

BCWA0280E

Revision: August 2004 AT-145 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A (LINE PRESSURE)

TCM terminals and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Wire
Terminal Item Condition Data (Approx.)
color
Pressure control When engine is running with idle speed and set-
35 L/Y 300Hz
solenoid valve A ting selector lever to “P” position.
Pressure control
When engine is running with idle speed and set-
40 L/G solenoid valve A 0V
ting selector lever to “P” position.
ground

Diagnostic Procedure ECS00A4B

1. CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A SIGNAL

With CONSULT-II
1. After warming up the engine and transaxle, turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
3. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
4. Read out the value of “PC SOL A OUT” and “PC SOL A MON”.
Display value
Monitor item Condition
(Approx.)
When releasing accelerator pedal with set-
1.00 A
● PC SOL A OUT ting selector lever to “P” position.
● PC SOL A MON When depressing accelerator pedal fully set-
0.32 A
ting selector lever to “P” position.

SCIA2907E

Without CONSULT-II
1. Start the engine.
2. Check pulse between TCM connector terminals 35 and 40.
Terminal (Wire Data
Connector Condition
color) (Approx.)
When engine is running with idle
F57 35 (L/Y) - 40 (L/G) speed and setting selector lever to 300 Hz
“P” position.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 2. SCIA2908E

2. CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect the TCM connector.
3. Check resistance between TCM connector terminals 35 and 40.
Terminal (Wire Resistance
Connector Condition
color) (Approx.)
F57 35 (L/Y) - 40 (L/G) Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 5.0 - 5.6 Ω

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 3.

SCIA2909E

Revision: August 2004 AT-146 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A (LINE PRESSURE)

3. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY WITH PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A A

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect terminal cord assembly harness connector.
3. Check resistance between terminals 3 and 6. B

Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.)

F62 3-6 Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 5.0 - 5.6 Ω AT
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 5. D

E
SCIA2910E

4. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY

F
Check the following.
● Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and terminal cord assembly.
OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
H
5. CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A
1. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-241, "Side cover" .
2. Disconnect pressure control solenoid valve A harness connector. I
3. Check resistance between terminals 1 and 2.
Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.) J
F105 1-2 Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 5.0 - 5.6 Ω
OK or NG
K
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-241,
"Control Valve Assembly" .
L

SCIA4326E

6. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY AND PRESSURE CONTROL SOLE- M
NOID VALVE A
Check the following.
● Open or short-circuit in the harness between terminal cord assembly and pressure control solenoid valve
A.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace transmission wire. Refer to AT-241, "Terminal cord assembly" .

7. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-144, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 8.

Revision: August 2004 AT-147 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A (LINE PRESSURE)

8. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-71, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Component Inspection ECS00A4C

PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A

1. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-241, "Side cover" .
2. Disconnect pressure control solenoid valve A harness connector.
3. Check resistance between terminals 1 and 2.
Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.)
F105 1-2 Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 5.0 - 5.6 Ω
4. If NG, replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-241,
"Control Valve Assembly" .

SCIA4326E

Revision: August 2004 AT-148 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A

DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A PFP:31940

A
Description ECS00A4D

● Shift solenoid valves are installed directly in control valve body. The shift solenoid valves operates of ON
and OFF by the control signal from TCM. Combinations of 5 shift solenoid valves, A, B, C, D and E, shifts B
gear positions.
● The shift solenoid valve A is a normally open, ON-OFF type solenoid.
Gear position D1 , M 1 D2 , M 2 D3 , M3 D4 , M 4 D5 , M5 Reverse AT
Shift solenoid valve A ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) OFF (Open)

On Board Diagnosis Logic ECS00A4E D

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
● Diagnostic trouble code “SHIFT SOL A” with CONSULT-II or P0750 without CONSULT-II is detected
under the following conditions. E
– When normal voltage is not applied to solenoid due to open, short, and so on.
– When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value.
F
Possible Cause ECS00A4F

● Harness or connectors
(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.) G
● Shift solenoid valve A
DTC Confirmation Procedure ECS00A4G
H
CAUTION:
● Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
● Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer. I
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. J
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) K
2. Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine.
L
4. Drive vehicle and allow the following conditions.
SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position
GEAR: 1st Þ 2nd position
5. If DTC is detected, go to AT-151, "Diagnostic Procedure" . M

BCIA0030E

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.

Revision: August 2004 AT-149 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A

Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/A ECS00A4H

BCWA0281E

Revision: August 2004 AT-150 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A

TCM terminal and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Wire A
Terminal Item Condition Data (Approx.)
color
When shift solenoid valve A operates.
Battery voltage
(When driving in 1st gear.)
Shift solenoid B
46 W/G
valve A
When shift solenoid valve A does not operate. 0V

AT
Diagnostic Procedure ECS00A4I

1. CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A SIGNAL

D
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II. E
3. Drive vehicle and read out the value of “SFT SOL A OUT” and
“SFT SOL A MON”.
F
Monitor item Condition Indication
When shift solenoid valve A operates.
● SFT SOL A OUT ON
(When driving in 1st gear.)
● SFT SOL A MON
G
When shift solenoid valve A does not operate. OFF

H
SCIA2874E

Without CONSULT-II I
1. Drive vehicle.
2. Check voltage between TCM connector terminal and ground.
J
Voltage
Connector Terminal (Wire color) Condition
(Approx.)
When shift solenoid valve A K
Battery
operates.
voltage
F57 46 (W/G) - Ground (When driving in 1st gear.)
When shift solenoid valve A L
0V
does not operate.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. SCIA2875E
M
NG >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect the TCM connector.
3. Check resistance between TCM connector terminal 46 and
ground.
Resistance
Connector Terminal (Wire color) Condition
(Approx.)
F57 46 (W/G) - Ground Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 11 - 16 Ω
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 3.
SCIA2877E

Revision: August 2004 AT-151 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A

3. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY WITH SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect terminal cord assembly harness connector.
3. Check resistance between terminal 2 and ground.
Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.)
F30 2 - Ground Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 11 - 16 Ω
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 5.

WCIA0449E

4. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY

Check the following.
● Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and terminal cord assembly.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

5. CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A

1. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-241, "Side cover" .
2. Disconnect shift solenoid valve A harness connector.
3. Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground.
Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.)
F100 1 - Ground Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 11 - 16 Ω
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-241,
"Control Valve Assembly" .

SCIA4334E

6. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY AND SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A
Check the following.
● Open or short-circuit in the harness between terminal cord assembly and shift solenoid valve A.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace transmission wire. Refer to AT-241, "Terminal cord assembly" .

7. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-149, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 8.

Revision: August 2004 AT-152 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A

8. CHECK TCM A
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-71, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG B
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
AT
Component Inspection ECS00A4J

SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A

1. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-241, "Side cover" . D
2. Disconnect shift solenoid valve A harness connector.
3. Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground.
Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.)
E

F100 1 - Ground Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 11 - 16 Ω

4. If NG, replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-241, F
"Control Valve Assembly" .

SCIA4334E

Revision: August 2004 AT-153 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B

DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B PFP:31940

Description ECS00A4K

● Shift solenoid valves are installed directly in control valve body. The shift solenoid valves operates of ON
and OFF by the control signal from TCM. Combinations of 5 shift solenoid valves, A, B, C, D and E, shifts
gear positions.
● The shift solenoid valve B is a normally closed, ON-OFF type solenoid.
Gear position D1 , M 1 D2 , M 2 D3 , M 3 D4 , M4 D5 , M 5 Reverse
Shift solenoid valve B ON (Open) OFF (Closed) OFF (Closed) OFF (Closed) ON (Open) OFF (Closed)

On Board Diagnosis Logic ECS00A4L

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “SHIFT SOL B” with CONSULT-II or P0755 without CONSULT-II is detected
under the following conditions.
– When normal voltage is not applied to solenoid due to open, short, and so on.
– When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value.
Possible Cause ECS00A4M

● Harness or connectors
(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
● Shift solenoid valve B
DTC Confirmation Procedure ECS00A4N

CAUTION:
● Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
● Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine.
4. Drive vehicle and allow the following conditions.
SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position
GEAR: 1st Þ 2nd and 4th Þ 5th position
5. If DTC is detected, go to AT-156, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

BCIA0030E

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.

Revision: August 2004 AT-154 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B

Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/B ECS00A4O

AT

BCWA0282E

Revision: August 2004 AT-155 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B

TCM terminal and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Wire
Terminal Item Condition Data (Approx.)
color
When shift solenoid valve B operates.
Battery voltage
(When driving in 1st or 5th gear.)
Shift solenoid
25 G/R
valve B
When shift solenoid valve B does not operate. 0V

Diagnostic Procedure ECS00A4P

1. CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B SIGNAL

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II.
3. Drive vehicle and read out the value of “SFT SOL B OUT” and
“SFT SOL B MON”.
Monitor item Condition Indication
When shift solenoid valve B operates.
● SFT SOL B OUT ON
(When driving in 1st or 5th gear.)
● SFT SOL B MON
When shift solenoid valve B does not operate. OFF

SCIA2879E

Without CONSULT-II
1. Drive vehicle.
2. Check voltage between TCM connector terminal and ground.
Voltage
Connector Terminal (Wire color) Condition
(Approx.)
When shift solenoid valve B
Battery
operates.
voltage
F57 25 (G/R) - Ground (When driving in 1st or 5th gear.)
When shift solenoid valve B does
0V
not operate.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. SCIA2880E

NG >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect the TCM connector.
3. Check resistance between TCM connector terminal 25 and
ground.
Resistance
Connector Terminal (Wire color) Condition
(Approx.)
F57 25 (G/R) - Ground Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 11 - 16 Ω
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 3.
SCIA2881E

Revision: August 2004 AT-156 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B

3. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY WITH SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B A

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect terminal cord assembly harness connector.
3. Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground. B

Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.)

F62 1 - Ground Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 11 - 16 Ω AT
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 5. D

E
WCIA0450E

4. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY

F
Check the following.
● Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and terminal cord assembly.
OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
H
5. CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B
1. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-241, "Side cover" .
2. Disconnect shift solenoid valve B harness connector. I
3. Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground.
Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.) J
F101 1 - Ground Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 11 - 16 Ω
OK or NG
K
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-241,
"Control Valve Assembly" .
L

SCIA4335E

6. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY AND SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B M

Check the following.

● Open or short-circuit in the harness between terminal cord assembly and shift solenoid valve B.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace transmission wire. Refer to AT-241, "Terminal cord assembly" .

7. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-154, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 8.

Revision: August 2004 AT-157 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B

8. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-71, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Component Inspection ECS00A4Q

SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B

1. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-241, "Side cover" .
2. Disconnect shift solenoid valve B harness connector.
3. Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground.
Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.)
F101 1 - Ground Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 11 - 16 Ω
4. If NG, replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-241,
"Control Valve Assembly" .

SCIA4335E

Revision: August 2004 AT-158 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0760 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C

DTC P0760 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C PFP:31940

A
Description ECS00A4R

● Shift solenoid valves are installed directly in control valve body. The shift solenoid valves operates of ON
and OFF by the control signal from TCM. Combinations of 5 shift solenoid valves, A, B, C, D and E, shifts B
gear positions.
● The shift solenoid valve C is a normally closed, ON-OFF type solenoid.
Gear position D1 , M 1 D2 , M 2 D3 , M3 D4 , M 4 D5 , M5 Reverse AT
Shift solenoid valve C ON (Open) ON (Open) ON (Open) OFF (Closed) OFF (Closed) ON (Open)

On Board Diagnosis Logic ECS00A4S D

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
● Diagnostic trouble code “SHIFT SOL C” with CONSULT-II or P0760 without CONSULT-II is detected
under the following conditions. E
– When normal voltage is not applied to solenoid due to open, short, and so on.
– When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value.
F
Possible Cause ECS00A4T

● Harness or connectors
(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.) G
● Shift solenoid valve C
DTC Confirmation Procedure ECS00A4U
H
CAUTION:
● Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
● Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer. I
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. J
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) K
2. Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine.
L
4. Drive vehicle and allow the following conditions.
SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position
GEAR: 3rd Þ 4th position
5. If DTC is detected, go to AT-161, "Diagnostic Procedure" . M

BCIA0030E

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.

Revision: August 2004 AT-159 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0760 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C

Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/C ECS00A4V

BCWA0283E

Revision: August 2004 AT-160 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0760 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C

TCM terminal and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Wire A
Terminal Item Condition Data (Approx.)
color
When shift solenoid valve C operates.
Battery voltage
(When driving in 1st, 2nd, 3rd or reverse gear.)
Shift solenoid B
37 R/B
valve C
When shift solenoid valve C does not operate. 0V

AT
Diagnostic Procedure ECS00A4W

1. CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C SIGNAL

D
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II. E
3. Drive vehicle and read out the value of “SFT SOL C OUT” and
“SFT SOL C MON”.
F
Monitor item Condition Indication
When shift solenoid valve C operates.
● SFT SOL C OUT ON
(When driving in 1st, 2nd, 3rd or reverse gear.)
● SFT SOL C MON
G
When shift solenoid valve C does not operate. OFF

H
SCIA2883E

Without CONSULT-II I
1. Drive vehicle.
2. Check voltage between TCM connector terminal and ground.
J
Voltage
Connector Terminal (Wire color) Condition
(Approx.)
When shift solenoid valve C K
operates. Battery
(When driving in 1st, 2nd, 3rd voltage
F57 37 (R/B) - Ground or reverse gear.)
L
When shift solenoid valve C
0V
does not operate.
OK or NG SCIA2884E
M
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 2.

Revision: August 2004 AT-161 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0760 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C

2. CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect the TCM connector.
3. Check resistance between TCM connector terminal 37 and
ground.
Resistance
Connector Terminal (Wire color) Condition
(Approx.)
F57 37 (R/B) - Ground Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 11 - 16 Ω
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 3.
SCIA2885E

3. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY WITH SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect terminal cord assembly harness connector.
3. Check resistance between terminal 4 and ground.
Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.)
F62 4 - Ground Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 11 - 16 Ω

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 5.

WCIA0451E

4. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY

Check the following.
● Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and terminal cord assembly.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

5. CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C

1. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-241, "Side cover" .
2. Disconnect shift solenoid valve C harness connector.
3. Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground.
Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.)
F102 1 - Ground Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 11 - 16 Ω
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-241,
"Control Valve Assembly" .

SCIA4338E

Revision: August 2004 AT-162 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0760 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C

6. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY AND SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C A
Check the following.
● Open or short-circuit in the harness between terminal cord assembly and shift solenoid valve C.
OK or NG B
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace transmission wire.
AT
7. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-159, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
D
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 8. E
8. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-71, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . F
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END G
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Component Inspection ECS00A4X
H
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C
1. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-241, "Side cover" .
2. Disconnect shift solenoid valve C harness connector. I
3. Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground.
Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.)
J
F102 1 - Ground Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 11 - 16 Ω
4. If NG, replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-241,
"Control Valve Assembly" .
K

L
SCIA4338E

Revision: August 2004 AT-163 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0762 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C STUCK ON

DTC P0762 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C STUCK ON PFP:31940

Description ECS00A4Y

● This malfunction will not be detected while the A/T CHECK indicator lamp is indicating another self-diag-
nosis malfunction.
● This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such
as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc.
● Shift solenoid valves are installed directly in control valve body. The shift solenoid valves operates of ON
and OFF by the control signal from TCM. Combinations of 5 shift solenoid valves, A, B, C, D and E, shifts
gear positions.
● The shift solenoid valve C is a normally closed, ON-OFF type solenoid.
Gear position D1 , M 1 D2 , M 2 D3 , M 3 D4 , M4 D5 , M 5 Reverse
Shift solenoid valve C ON (Open) ON (Open) ON (Open) OFF (Closed) OFF (Closed) ON (Open)

On Board Diagnosis Logic ECS00A4Z

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “SFT SOL C STUCK ON” with CONSULT-II or P0762 without CONSULT-II is
detected when condition of shift solenoid valve C is different from monitor value, and relation between
gear position and actual gear ratio is irregular.
Possible Cause ECS00A50

● Shift solenoid valve C

(On stick.)
● Hydraulic control circuit
DTC Confirmation Procedure ECS00A51

CAUTION:
● Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
● Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine.
4. Drive vehicle and allow the following conditions.
SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position
GEAR: 3rd Þ 4th position
ACCELE ANGLE: More than 10 %
5. If DTC is detected, go to AT-166, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

BCIA0030E

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.

Revision: August 2004 AT-164 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0762 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C STUCK ON

Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/CS ECS00A52

AT

BCWA0284E

Revision: August 2004 AT-165 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0762 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C STUCK ON

TCM terminal and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Wire
Terminal Item Condition Data (Approx.)
color
When shift solenoid valve C operates.
Battery voltage
(When driving in 1st, 2nd, 3rd or reverse gear.)
Shift solenoid
37 R/B
valve C
When shift solenoid valve C does not operate. 0V

Diagnostic Procedure ECS00A53

1. CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C SIGNAL

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II.
3. Drive vehicle and read out the value of “SFT SOL C OUT” and
“SFT SOL C MON”.
Monitor item Condition Indication
When shift solenoid valve C operates.
● SFT SOL C OUT ON
(When driving in 1st, 2nd, 3rd or reverse gear.)
● SFT SOL C MON
When shift solenoid valve C does not operate. OFF

SCIA2883E

Without CONSULT-II
1. Drive vehicle.
2. Check voltage between TCM connector terminal and ground.
Voltage
Connector Terminal (Wire color) Condition
(Approx.)
When shift solenoid valve C
operates. Battery
(When driving in 1st, 2nd, 3rd or voltage
F57 37 (R/B) - Ground reverse gear.)
When shift solenoid valve C
0V
does not operate.
OK or NG SCIA2884E

OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 2.

Revision: August 2004 AT-166 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0762 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C STUCK ON

2. CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C CIRCUIT A

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect the TCM connector.
3. Check resistance between TCM connector terminal 37 and B
ground.
Resistance
Connector Terminal (Wire color) Condition AT
(Approx.)
F57 37 (R/B) - Ground Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 11 - 16 Ω
OK or NG D
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 3.
E
SCIA2885E

3. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY WITH SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C

F
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect terminal cord assembly harness connector.
3. Check resistance between terminal 4 and ground. G
Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.)
F62 4 - Ground Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 11 - 16 Ω
H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 5. I

WCIA0451E J

4. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY

Check the following. K
● Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and terminal cord assembly.
OK or NG
L
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

5. CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C M

1. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-241, "Side cover" .

2. Disconnect shift solenoid valve C harness connector.
3. Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground.
Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.)
F102 1 - Ground Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 11 - 16 Ω
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-241,
"Control Valve Assembly" .

SCIA4338E

Revision: August 2004 AT-167 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0762 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C STUCK ON

6. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY AND SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C
Check the following.
● Open or short-circuit in the harness between terminal cord assembly and shift solenoid valve C.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace transmission wire. Refer to AT-241, "Terminal cord assembly" .

7. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-71, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

8. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-164, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-241, "Control Valve Assembly" .
Component Inspection ECS00A54

SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C

1. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-241, "Side cover" .
2. Disconnect shift solenoid valve C harness connector.
3. Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground.
Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.)
F102 1 - Ground Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 11 - 16 Ω
4. If NG, replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-241,
"Control Valve Assembly" .

SCIA4338E

Revision: August 2004 AT-168 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0765 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D

DTC P0765 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D PFP:31940

A
Description ECS00A55

● Shift solenoid valves are installed directly in control valve body. The shift solenoid valves operates of ON
and OFF by the control signal from TCM. Combinations of 5 shift solenoid valves, A, B, C, D and E, shifts B
gear positions.
● The shift solenoid valve D is a normally open, ON-OFF type solenoid.
Gear position D1 , M 1 D2 , M 2 D3 , M3 D4 , M 4 D5 , M5 Reverse AT
Shift solenoid valve D OFF (Open) OFF (Open) ON (Closed) ON (Closed) ON (Closed) OFF (Open)

On Board Diagnosis Logic ECS00A56 D

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
● Diagnostic trouble code “SHIFT SOL D” with CONSULT-II or P0765 without CONSULT-II is detected
under the following conditions. E
– When normal voltage is not applied to solenoid due to open, short, and so on.
– When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value.
F
Possible Cause ECS00A57

● Harness or connectors
(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.) G
● Shift solenoid valve D
DTC Confirmation Procedure ECS00A58
H
CAUTION:
● Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
● Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer. I
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. J
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) K
2. Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine.
L
4. Drive vehicle and allow the following conditions.
SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position
GEAR: 2nd Þ 3rd position
5. If DTC is detected, go to AT-171, "Diagnostic Procedure" . M

BCIA0030E

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.

Revision: August 2004 AT-169 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0765 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D

Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/D ECS00A59

BCWA0285E

Revision: August 2004 AT-170 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0765 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D

TCM terminal and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Wire A
Terminal Item Condition Data (Approx.)
color
When shift solenoid valve D operates.
Battery voltage
(When driving in 3rd, 4th or 5th gear.)
Shift solenoid B
26 V/W
valve D
When shift solenoid valve D does not operate. 0V

AT
Diagnostic Procedure ECS00A5A

1. CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D SIGNAL

D
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II. E
3. Drive vehicle and read out the value of “SFT SOL D OUT” and
“SFT SOL D MON”.
F
Monitor item Condition Indication
When shift solenoid valve D operates.
● SFT SOL D OUT ON
(When driving in 3rd, 4th or 5th gear.)
● SFT SOL D MON
G
When shift solenoid valve D does not operate. OFF

H
SCIA2888E

Without CONSULT-II I
1. Drive vehicle.
2. Check voltage between TCM connector terminal and ground.
J
Voltage
Connector Terminal (Wire color) Condition
(Approx.)
When shift solenoid valve D K
operates. Battery
(When driving in 3rd, 4th or 5th voltage
F57 26 (V/W) - Ground gear.)
L
When shift solenoid valve D
0V
does not operate.
OK or NG SCIA2889E
M
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 2.

Revision: August 2004 AT-171 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0765 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D

2. CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect the TCM connector.
3. Check resistance between TCM connector terminal 26 and
ground.
Resistance
Connector Terminal (Wire color) Condition
(Approx.)
F57 26 (V/W) - Ground Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 11 - 16 Ω
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 3.
SCIA2890E

3. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY WITH SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect terminal cord assembly harness connector.
3. Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground.
Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.)
F30 1 - Ground Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 11 - 16 Ω

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 5.

WCIA0453E

4. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY

Check the following.
● Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and terminal cord assembly.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

5. CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D

1. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-241, "Side cover" .
2. Disconnect shift solenoid valve D harness connector.
3. Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground.
Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.)
F103 1 - Ground Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 11 - 16 Ω
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-241,
"Control Valve Assembly" .

SCIA4339E

Revision: August 2004 AT-172 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0765 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D

6. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY AND SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D A
Check the following.
● Open or short-circuit in the harness between terminal cord assembly and shift solenoid valve D.
OK or NG B
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace transmission wire. Refer to AT-241, "Terminal cord assembly" .
AT
7. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-169, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
D
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 8. E
8. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-71, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . F
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END G
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Component Inspection ECS00A5B
H
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D
1. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-241, "Side cover" .
2. Disconnect shift solenoid valve D harness connector. I
3. Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground.
Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.)
J
F103 1 - Ground Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 11 - 16 Ω
4. If NG, replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-241,
"Control Valve Assembly" .
K

L
SCIA4339E

Revision: August 2004 AT-173 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0770 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E

DTC P0770 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E PFP:31940

Description ECS00A5C

● Shift solenoid valves are installed directly in control valve body. The shift solenoid valves operates of ON
and OFF by the control signal from TCM. Combinations of 5 shift solenoid valves, A, B, C, D and E, shifts
gear positions.
● The shift solenoid valve E is a normally closed, ON-OFF type solenoid.
Gear position D1 M1 D 2 , M2 D3 , M3 D4 , M 4 D5 , M 5 Reverse
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
Shift solenoid valve E ON (Open) ON (Open)
(Closed) (Closed) (Closed) (Closed) (Closed)
NOTE:
The condition of shift solenoid valve E is ON (Open) with shifting D2 ⇔ D3 and D3 ⇔ D4 .

On Board Diagnosis Logic ECS00A5D

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “SHIFT SOL E” with CONSULT-II or P0770 without CONSULT-II is detected
under the following conditions.
– When normal voltage is not applied to solenoid due to open, short, and so on.
– When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value.
Possible Cause ECS00A5E

● Harness or connectors
(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
● Shift solenoid valve E
DTC Confirmation Procedure ECS00A5F

CAUTION:
● Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
● Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine.
4. Move selector lever between “N” and “R”.
SLCT LVR POSI: “N” ⇔ “R” position
5. If DTC is detected, go to AT-176, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

BCIA0030E

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.

Revision: August 2004 AT-174 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0770 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E

Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/E ECS00A5G

AT

BCWA0286E

Revision: August 2004 AT-175 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0770 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E

TCM terminal and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Wire
Terminal Item Condition Data (Approx.)
color
When shift solenoid valve E operates.
Battery voltage
(When driving in reverse gear.)
Shift solenoid
47 BR/Y
valve E
When shift solenoid valve E does not operate. 0V

Diagnostic Procedure ECS00A5H

1. CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E SIGNAL

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II.
3. Drive vehicle and read out the value of “SFT SOL E OUT” and
“SFT SOL E MON”.
Monitor item Condition Indication
When shift solenoid valve E operates.
● SFT SOL E OUT ON
(When driving in reverse gear.)
● SFT SOL E MON
When shift solenoid valve E does not operate. OFF

SCIA2895E

Without CONSULT-II
1. Drive vehicle.
2. Check voltage between TCM connector terminal and ground.
Voltage
Connector Terminal (Wire color) Condition
(Approx.)
When shift solenoid valve E
Battery
operates.
voltage
F57 47 (BR/Y) - Ground (When driving in reverse gear.)
When shift solenoid valve E
0V
does not operate.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. SCIA2896E

NG >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect the TCM connector.
3. Check resistance between TCM connector terminal 47 and
ground.
Resistance
Connector Terminal (Wire color) Condition
(Approx.)
F57 47 (BR/Y) - Ground Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 11 - 16 Ω
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 3.
SCIA2897E

Revision: August 2004 AT-176 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0770 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E

3. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY WITH SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E A

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect terminal cord assembly harness connector.
3. Check resistance between terminal 5 and ground. B

Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.)

F30 5 - Ground Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 11 - 16 Ω AT
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 5. D

E
WCIA0452E

4. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY

F
Check the following.
● Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and terminal cord assembly.
OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
H
5. CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E
1. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-241, "Side cover" .
2. Disconnect shift solenoid valve E harness connector. I
3. Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground.
Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.) J
F104 1 - Ground Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 11 - 16 Ω
OK or NG
K
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-241,
"Control Valve Assembly" .
L

SCIA4340E

6. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY AND SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E M

Check the following.

● Open or short-circuit in the harness between terminal cord assembly and shift solenoid valve E.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace transmission wire. Refer to AT-241, "Terminal cord assembly" .

7. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-174, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 8.

Revision: August 2004 AT-177 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0770 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E

8. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-71, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Component Inspection ECS00A5I

SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E

1. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-241, "Side cover" .
2. Disconnect shift solenoid valve E harness connector.
3. Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground.
Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.)
F104 1 - Ground Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 11 - 16 Ω
4. If NG, replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-241,
"Control Valve Assembly" .

SCIA4340E

Revision: August 2004 AT-178 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0775 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B (SHIFT PRESSURE)

DTC P0775 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B (SHIFT PRESSURE)

PFP:31940 A
Description ECS00A5J

● The pressure control solenoid valve B is normally high, 3-port

B
linear pressure control solenoid.
● The pressure control solenoid valve B controls linear shift pres-
sure by control signal from TCM and controls 2nd coast brake
directly under 2nd, 3rd, 4th and direct clutch directly under 5th AT
and reverse.

SCIA2831E
E
On Board Diagnosis Logic ECS00A5K

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

F
● Diagnostic trouble code “PC SOL B(SFT/PRS)” with CONSULT-II or P0775 without CONSULT-II is
detected under the following conditions.
– When normal voltage is not applied to solenoid due to open, short, and so on.
G
– When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value.
Possible Cause ECS00A5L

H
● Harness or connectors
(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
● Pressure control solenoid valve B
I
DTC Confirmation Procedure ECS00A5M

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” J
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II K
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine. L
4. Run engine for at least 13 consecutive seconds at idle speed.
5. If DTC is detected, go to AT-181, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
M

BCIA0030E

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.

Revision: August 2004 AT-179 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0775 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B (SHIFT PRESSURE)

Wiring Diagram — AT — PC/B ECS00A5N

BCWA0287E

Revision: August 2004 AT-180 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0775 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B (SHIFT PRESSURE)

TCM terminals and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Wire A
Terminal Item Condition Data (Approx.)
color
Pressure control
When engine is running with idle speed and set-
21 G/B solenoid valve B 0V
ting selector lever to “P” position. B
ground
Pressure control When engine is running with idle speed and set-
36 O/B 300Hz
solenoid valve B ting selector lever to “P” position.
AT
Diagnostic Procedure ECS00A5O

1. CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B SIGNAL

D
With CONSULT-II
1. After warming up the engine and transaxle, turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) E
3. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
4. Read out the value of “PC SOL B OUT” and “PC SOL B MON”.
F
Display value
Monitor item Condition
(Approx.)
● PC SOL B OUT Selector lever: Manual shift gate position 1.00 A G
● PC SOL B MON Other than the above. 0.30 A

SCIA2907E
I
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start the engine.
J
2. Check pulse between TCM connector terminals 21 and 36.
Data
Connector Terminal (Wire color) Condition
(Approx.) K
When engine is running with idle
36 (O/B) - 21 (G/B)
F57 speed and setting selector lever 300 Hz
(Ground)
to “P” position. L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 2. SCIA2911E
M

2. CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect the TCM connector.
3. Check resistance between TCM connector terminals 21 and 36.
Resistance
Connector Terminal (Wire color) Condition
(Approx.)
36 (O/B) - 21 (G/B)
F57 Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 5.0 - 5.6 Ω
(Ground)

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 3.

SCIA2912E

Revision: August 2004 AT-181 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0775 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B (SHIFT PRESSURE)

3. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY WITH PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect terminal cord assembly harness connector.
3. Check resistance between terminals 3 and 7.
Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.)
F62 3-7 Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 5.0 - 5.6 Ω
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 5.

SCIA2913E

4. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY

Check the following.
● Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and terminal cord assembly.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

5. CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B

1. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-241, "Side cover" .
2. Disconnect pressure control solenoid valve B harness connector.
3. Check resistance between terminals 1 and 2.
Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.)
F106 1-2 Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 5.0 - 5.6 Ω
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-241,
"Control Valve Assembly" .

SCIA4341E

6. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY AND PRESSURE CONTROL SOLE-
NOID VALVE B
Check the following.
● Open or short-circuit in the harness between terminal cord assembly and pressure control solenoid valve
B.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace transmission wire. Refer to AT-241, "Terminal cord assembly" .

7. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-179, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 8.

Revision: August 2004 AT-182 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0775 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B (SHIFT PRESSURE)

8. CHECK TCM A
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-71, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG B
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
AT
Component Inspection ECS00A5P

PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B

1. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-241, "Side cover" . D
2. Disconnect pressure control solenoid valve B harness connector.
3. Check resistance between terminals 1 and 2.
Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.)
E

F106 1-2 Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 5.0 - 5.6 Ω

4. If NG, replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-241, F
"Control Valve Assembly" .

SCIA4341E

Revision: August 2004 AT-183 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0780 SHIFT

DTC P0780 SHIFT PFP:31940

Description ECS00A5Q

● This malfunction will not be detected while the A/T CHECK indicator lamp is indicating another self-diag-
nosis malfunction.
● This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift as instructed by the TCM. This is not caused by
electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control valve stick-
ing, improper solenoid valve operation, etc.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ECS00A5R

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “SHIFT” with CONSULT-II or P0780 without CONSULT-II is detected under the
following conditions.
– When no rotation change occurs between input (turbine revolution sensor) and output (revolution sensor)
and shifting time is long.
– When shifting ends immediately.
– When engine revs up unusually during shifting.
Possible Cause ECS00A5S

● Shift solenoid valve D

(Off error.)
● Shift solenoid valve E
(Off error.)
● Pressure control solenoid valve A
(On/Off error.)
● Pressure control solenoid valve B
(On/Off error.)
● Pressure control solenoid valve C
(On/Off error.)
● Hydraulic control circuit
DTC Confirmation Procedure ECS00A5T

CAUTION:
● Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
● Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in
CONSULT-II.
2. Make sure that ATF temperature is within the range below.
FLUID TEMP: More than 60°C (140°F)
If out of range, drive the vehicle to warm up the fluid.
3. Drive vehicle and allow the following conditions.
SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position
GEAR: 1st Þ 2nd Þ 3rd Þ 4th Þ 5th position
(Vehicle speed: Refer to AT-312, "VEHICLE SPEED WHEN
SHIFTING GEARS" .)
4. If DTC is detected, go to AT-187, "Diagnostic Procedure" . BCIA0030E

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.

Revision: August 2004 AT-184 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0780 SHIFT

Wiring Diagram — AT — SFTFNC ECS00A5U

AT

BCWA0288E

Revision: August 2004 AT-185 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0780 SHIFT

BCWA0289E

Revision: August 2004 AT-186 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0780 SHIFT

TCM terminals and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Wire A
Terminal Item Condition Data (Approx.)
color

Pressure control
When engine is running with idle speed and set-
21 G/B solenoid valve B 0V B
ting selector lever to “P” position.
ground

When shift solenoid valve D operates.

Battery voltage
(When driving in 3rd, 4th or 5th gear.) AT
Shift solenoid
26 V/W
valve D
When shift solenoid valve D does not operate. 0V
D
Pressure control
When engine is running with idle speed and set-
28 W solenoid valve C 0V
ting selector lever to “P” position.
ground
E
Pressure control When engine is running with idle speed and set-
35 L/Y 300Hz
solenoid valve A ting selector lever to “P” position.
Pressure control When engine is running with idle speed and set-
36 O/B 300Hz F
solenoid valve B ting selector lever to “P” position.
Pressure control
When engine is running with idle speed and set-
40 L/G solenoid valve A 0V
ting selector lever to “P” position.
ground G
Pressure control When engine is running with idle speed and set-
45 O 300Hz
solenoid valve C ting selector lever to “P” position.
When shift solenoid valve E operates. H
Battery voltage
(When driving in reverse gear.)
Shift solenoid
47 BR/Y
valve E
When shift solenoid valve E does not operate. 0V I

Diagnostic Procedure ECS00A5V

J
1. CHECK EACH SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT
Perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for the following DTCs.
● “DTC P0765 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D” (Refer to AT-171, "Diagnostic Procedure" .) K
● “DTC P0770 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E” (Refer to AT-176, "Diagnostic Procedure" .)
OK or NG
L
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

2. CHECK EACH PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT M

Perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for the following DTCs.

● “DTC P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A” (Refer to AT-146, "Diagnostic Procedure" .)
● “DTC P0775 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B” (Refer to AT-181, "Diagnostic Procedure" .)
● “DTC P0795 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C” (Refer to AT-190, "Diagnostic Procedure" .)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

3. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-184, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-241, "Control Valve Assembly" .

Revision: August 2004 AT-187 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0795 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C (TCC AND SHIFT
PRESSURE)

DTC P0795 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C (TCC AND SHIFT PRES-
SURE) PFP:31940

Description ECS00A5W

● The pressure control solenoid valve C is normally low, 3-port lin-

ear pressure control solenoid.
● The pressure control solenoid valve C is activated to control the
apply and release of the 2nd brake and 1st and reverse brake,
and torque converter clutch.
● Lock-up operation, however, is prohibited when A/T fluid tem-
perature is too low.
● When the accelerator pedal is depressed (less than 1/8) in lock-
up condition, the engine speed should not change abruptly. If
there is a big jump in engine speed, there is no lock-up.
SCIA2833E

On Board Diagnosis Logic ECS00A5X

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “PC SOL C(TCC&SFT)” with CONSULT-II or P0795 without CONSULT-II is
detected under the following conditions.
– When normal voltage is not applied to solenoid due to open, short, and so on.
– When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value.
Possible Cause ECS00A5Y

● Harness or connectors
(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
● Pressure control solenoid valve C
DTC Confirmation Procedure ECS00A5Z

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine.
4. Run engine for at least 13 consecutive seconds at idle speed.
5. If DTC is detected, go to AT-190, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

BCIA0030E

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.

Revision: August 2004 AT-188 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0795 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C (TCC AND SHIFT
PRESSURE)

Wiring Diagram — AT — PC/C ECS00A60

AT

BCWA0290E

Revision: August 2004 AT-189 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0795 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C (TCC AND SHIFT
PRESSURE)

TCM terminals and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Wire
Terminal Item Condition Data (Approx.)
color
Pressure control
When engine is running with idle speed and set-
28 W solenoid valve C 0V
ting selector lever to “P” position.
ground
Pressure control When engine is running with idle speed and set-
45 O 300Hz
solenoid valve C ting selector lever to “P” position.

Diagnostic Procedure ECS00A61

1. CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C SIGNAL

With CONSULT-II
1. After warming up the engine and transaxle, turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
3. Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II.
4. Read out the value of “PC SOL C OUT” and “PC SOL C MON”.
Display value
Monitor item Condition
(Approx.)
● PC SOL C OUT Selector lever: Manual shift gate position 1.00 A
● PC SOL C MON Other than the above. 0.20 A

SCIA2907E

Without CONSULT-II
1. Start the engine.
2. Check pulse between TCM connector terminals 28 and 45.
Data
Connector Terminal (Wire color) Condition
(Approx.)
When engine is running with idle
45 (O) - 28 (W)
F57 speed and setting selector lever 300 Hz
(Ground)
to “P” position.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 2. SCIA2914E

2. CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect the TCM connector.
3. Check resistance between TCM connector terminals 28 and 45.
Resistance
Connector Terminal (Wire color) Condition
(Approx.)
45 (O) - 28 (W)
F57 Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 5.0 - 5.6 Ω
(Ground)

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 3.

SCIA2915E

Revision: August 2004 AT-190 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0795 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C (TCC AND SHIFT
PRESSURE)

3. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY WITH PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C A

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect terminal cord assembly harness connector.
3. Check resistance between terminals 2 and 5. B

Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.)

F62 2-5 Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 5.0 - 5.6 Ω AT
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 5. D

E
SCIA2916E

4. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY

F
Check the following.
● Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and terminal cord assembly.
OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
H
5. CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C
1. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-241, "Side cover" .
2. Disconnect pressure control solenoid valve C harness connector. I
3. Check resistance between terminals 1 and 2.
Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.) J
F107 1-2 Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 5.0 - 5.6 Ω
OK or NG
K
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-241,
"Control Valve Assembly" .
L

SCIA4342E

6. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY AND PRESSURE CONTROL SOLE- M
NOID VALVE C
Check the following.
● Open or short-circuit in the harness between terminal cord assembly and pressure control solenoid valve
C.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace transmission wire. Refer to AT-241, "Terminal cord assembly" .

7. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-188, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 8.

Revision: August 2004 AT-191 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0795 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C (TCC AND SHIFT
PRESSURE)

8. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-71, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Component Inspection ECS00A62

PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C

1. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-241, "Side cover" .
2. Disconnect pressure control solenoid valve C harness connector.
3. Check resistance between terminals 1 and 2.
Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.)
F107 1-2 Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 5.0 - 5.6 Ω
4. If NG, replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-241,
"Control Valve Assembly" .

SCIA4342E

Revision: August 2004 AT-192 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0797 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C STUCK ON

DTC P0797 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C STUCK ON PFP:31940

A
Description ECS00A63

● This malfunction will not be detected while the A/T CHECK indicator lamp is indicating another self-diag-
nosis malfunction. B
● This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such
as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc.
● The pressure control solenoid valve C is normally low, 3-port lin- AT
ear pressure control solenoid.
● The pressure control solenoid valve C is activated to control the
apply and release of the 2nd brake and 1st and reverse brake, D
and torque converter clutch.
● Lock-up operation, however, is prohibited when A/T fluid tem-
perature is too low.
E
● When the accelerator pedal is depressed (less than 1/8) in lock-
up condition, the engine speed should not change abruptly. If
there is a big jump in engine speed, there is no lock-up.
SCIA2833E F
On Board Diagnosis Logic ECS00A64

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. G

● Diagnostic trouble code “PC SOL C STC ON” with CONSULT-II or P0797 without CONSULT-II is detected
when condition of pressure control solenoid valve C is different from monitor value, and relation between
gear position and actual gear ratio or lock-up status is irregular.
H
Possible Cause ECS00A65

● Pressure control solenoid valve C

(On stick.) I
● Hydraulic control circuit
DTC Confirmation Procedure ECS00A66
J
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. K
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) L
2. Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine.
M
4. Run engine for at least 4 consecutive minutes at idle speed.
5. If DTC is detected, go to AT-195, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

BCIA0030E

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.

Revision: August 2004 AT-193 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0797 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C STUCK ON

Wiring Diagram — AT — PC/CS ECS00A67

BCWA0291E

Revision: August 2004 AT-194 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0797 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C STUCK ON

TCM terminals and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Wire A
Terminal Item Condition Data (Approx.)
color
Pressure control
When engine is running with idle speed and set-
28 W solenoid valve C 0V
ting selector lever to “P” position. B
ground
Pressure control When engine is running with idle speed and set-
45 O 300Hz
solenoid valve C ting selector lever to “P” position.
AT
Diagnostic Procedure ECS00A68

1. CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C SIGNAL

D
With CONSULT-II
1. After warming up the engine and transaxle, turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) E
3. Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II.
4. Read out the value of “PC SOL C OUT” and “PC SOL C MON”.
F
Display value
Monitor item Condition
(Approx.)
● PC SOL C OUT Selector lever: Manual shift gate position 1.00 A G
● PC SOL C MON Other than the above. 0.20 A

SCIA2907E
I
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start the engine.
J
2. Check pulse between TCM connector terminals 28 and 45.
Data
Connector Terminal (Wire color) Condition
(Approx.) K
When engine is running with idle
45 (O) - 28 (W)
F57 speed and setting selector lever 300 Hz
(Ground)
to “P” position. L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 2. SCIA2914E
M

2. CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect the TCM connector.
3. Check resistance between TCM connector terminals 28 and 45.
Resistance
Connector Terminal (Wire color) Condition
(Approx.)
45 (O) - 28 (W)
F57 Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 5.0 - 5.6 Ω
(Ground)

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 3.

SCIA2915E

Revision: August 2004 AT-195 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0797 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C STUCK ON

3. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY WITH PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect terminal cord assembly harness connector.
3. Check resistance between terminals 2 and 5.
Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.)
F62 2-5 Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 5.0 - 5.6 Ω
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 5.

SCIA2916E

4. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY

Check the following.

● Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and terminal cord assembly.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

5. CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C

1. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-241, "Side cover" .
2. Disconnect pressure control solenoid valve C harness connector.
3. Check resistance between terminals 1 and 2.
Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.)
F107 1-2 Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 5.0 - 5.6 Ω
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-241,
"Control Valve Assembly" .

SCIA4342E

6. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY AND PRESSURE CONTROL SOLE-
NOID VALVE C
Check the following.
● Open or short-circuit in the harness between terminal cord assembly and pressure control solenoid valve
C.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace transmission wire. Refer to AT-241, "Terminal cord assembly" .

7. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-71, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: August 2004 AT-196 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0797 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C STUCK ON

8. CHECK DTC A
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-193, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END B
NG >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-241, "Control Valve Assembly" .
Component Inspection ECS00A69
AT
PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C
1. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-241, "Side cover" .
2. Disconnect pressure control solenoid valve C harness connector. D
3. Check resistance between terminals 1 and 2.
Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.)
E
F107 1-2 Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 5.0 - 5.6 Ω
4. If NG, replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-241,
"Control Valve Assembly" .
F

G
SCIA4342E

Revision: August 2004 AT-197 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0826 MANUAL MODE SWITCH CIRCUIT

DTC P0826 MANUAL MODE SWITCH CIRCUIT PFP:34901

Description ECS00A6A

Manual mode switch is installed in A/T device. It sends manual mode switch, shift up and shift down switch
signals to TCM.
TCM sends the switch signals to unified meter and A/C amp. by CAN communication line. Then manual mode
switch position is indicated on the A/T indicator. For inspection, refer to AT-203, "Position Indicator" .
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ECS00A6B

Monitor Item Condition Reference Value

Manual shift gate position (neutral) ON
MANU MODE SW (ON/OFF)
Other than the above OFF
Manual shift gate position OFF
NON M-MODE SW (ON/OFF)
Other than the above ON
Selector lever: + side ON
UP SW (ON/OFF)
Other than the above OFF
Selector lever: - side ON
DOWN SW (ON/OFF)
Other than the above OFF

On Board Diagnosis Logic ECS00A6C

● This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “MANUAL MODE SWITCH” with CONSULT-II is detected when TCM monitors
manual mode, non manual mode, up or down switch signals, and judges as irregular when impossible
input pattern occurs.
Possible Cause ECS00A6D

● Harness or connectors
(These switches circuit is open or shorted.)
● Manual mode switch (built into A/T device)
DTC Confirmation Procedure ECS00A6E

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II.
3. Move selector lever to “M” position (manual shift gate position).
4. Shift selector lever into “+ side” and “- side”.
5. Wait for at least 30 consecutive seconds.
6. If DTC is detected, go to AT-201, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

BCIA0030E

Revision: August 2004 AT-198 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0826 MANUAL MODE SWITCH CIRCUIT

Wiring Diagram — AT — MMSW ECS00A6F

AT

BCWA0292E

Revision: August 2004 AT-199 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0826 MANUAL MODE SWITCH CIRCUIT

TCM terminals and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Wire
Terminal Item Condition Data (Approx.)
color

Manual mode Selector lever: + side 0V

5 R/G
switch UP (+) Other than the above Battery voltage

Manual mode Selector lever: - side 0V

6 L/R
switch DOWN (-) Other than the above Battery voltage

Manual mode Selector lever: “P”, “R”, “N” or “D” position 0V

16 SB
switch AUTO Selector lever: Manual shift gate position Battery voltage

Manual mode Selector lever: Manual shift gate position (neutral) 0V

19 V/R
switch MANUAL Other than the above Battery voltage

Revision: August 2004 AT-200 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0826 MANUAL MODE SWITCH CIRCUIT

Diagnostic Procedure ECS00A6G

1. CHECK MANUAL MODE SWITCH CIRCUIT A

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) B
2. Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II.
3. Read out ON/OFF switching action of the “MANU MODE SW”,
“NON M-MODE SW”, “UP SW”, “DOWN SW”. AT

SCIA2917E
F

Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) G
2. Check voltage between the TCM connector terminals and
ground.
H
Connector Terminal (Wire Voltage
Condition
No. color) (Approx.)
Selector lever: + side 0V
5 (R/G) - I
Ground Battery
Other than the above
voltage
Selector lever: - side 0V
6 (L/R) - J
Ground Battery
Other than the above SCIA2918E
voltage

F56 Selector lever: “P”, “R”, “N” or “D” posi- K

0V
16 (SB) - tion
Ground Selector lever: Manual shift gate posi- Battery
tion voltage
L
Selector lever: Manual shift gate posi-
0V
19 (V/R) - tion (neutral)
Ground Battery
Other than the above M
voltage

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.

Revision: August 2004 AT-201 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0826 MANUAL MODE SWITCH CIRCUIT

2. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND A/T DEVICE (MANUAL MODE SWITCH)
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect the TCM connector.
3. Check the continuity between TCM connector terminals 5, 6, 16,
19 and ground.
Connector Terminal (Wire
Condition Continuity
No. color)

5 (R/G) - Selector lever: + side Yes

Ground Other than the above No

6 (L/R) - Selector lever: - side Yes

Ground Other than the above No
Selector lever: “P”, “R”, “N” or “D” posi- SCIA2919E
F56 Yes
16 (SB) - tion
Ground Selector lever: Manual shift gate posi-
No
tion
Selector lever: Manual shift gate posi-
19 (V/R) - Yes
tion (neutral)
Ground
Other than the above No
4. If OK, check harness for short-circuit to ground or power source.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

Check the following.
● Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and A/T device (manual mode switch).
● Open or short-circuit in the harness for ground of manual mode switch.
● Manual mode switch. Refer to AT-203, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

4. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-198, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 5.

5. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-71, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: August 2004 AT-202 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0826 MANUAL MODE SWITCH CIRCUIT

Component Inspection ECS00A6H

MANUAL MODE SWITCH A

Check continuity between terminals.
Terminal B
Item Position Connector Continuity
(Unit side)

Manual mode Auto 11 - 12

(select) switch Manual 3 - 11 AT
M34 Yes
UP switch UP 8 - 11
DOWN switch DOWN 7 - 11
D
WCIA0454E

Position Indicator ECS00A6I

E
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS (WITH CONSULT-II)
F
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II and G
read out the value of “MANU GR POSI”.
3. Drive vehicle in the manual mode, and make sure that the actual
gear position and the meter's indication of the position mutually H
coincide when the selector lever is shifted to the “+ (up)” or “-
(down)” side (1st ⇔ 5th gear).
OK or NG I
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 2.
SCIA2920E J

2. CHECK DTC WITH TCM

K
Perform self-diagnosis of TCM. Refer to AT-75, "SELF-DIAG RESULT MODE" .
OK or NG
OK >> Check combination meter. Refer to DI-50, "A/T INDICATOR" . L
NG >> Check the malfunctioning system.

Revision: August 2004 AT-203 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0882 TCM POWER INPUT SIGNAL

DTC P0882 TCM POWER INPUT SIGNAL PFP:31036

Description ECS00A6J

When the power supply to the TCM is cut “OFF”, for example because the battery is removed, and the self-
diagnostics memory function stops, malfunction is detected.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ECS00A6K

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “TCM POWER INPT SIG” with CONSULT-II or P0882 without CONSULT-II is
detected when voltage supplied to TCM is too low.
Possible Cause ECS00A6L

● Harness or connectors
(Battery or ignition switch and TCM circuit is open or shorted.)
● A/T PV IGN relay
DTC Confirmation Procedure ECS00A6M

CAUTION:
● Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
● Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine.
4. Depress accelerator pedal or drive vehicle and maintain the fol-
lowing condition for at least 20 consecutive seconds.
TURBINE REV: More than 800 rpm
5. If DTC is detected, go to AT-207, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

BCIA0030E

Revision: August 2004 AT-204 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0882 TCM POWER INPUT SIGNAL

Wiring Diagram — AT — PWR/IN ECS00A6N

AT

BCWA0293E

Revision: August 2004 AT-205 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0882 TCM POWER INPUT SIGNAL

TCM terminals and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Wire
Terminal Item Condition Data (Approx.)
color

When turning ignition switch ON. 0 - 1.5V

1 L/B A/T PV IGN relay

When turning ignition switch OFF. 0V

14 B Ground Always 0V

When turning ignition switch ON. Battery voltage

Power supply
27 Y/R
(Memory back-up)
When turning ignition switch OFF. Battery voltage

When turning ignition switch ON. Battery voltage

34 Y Power supply

When turning ignition switch OFF. 0V

When turning ignition switch ON. Battery voltage

Power supply
38 R/Y
(A/T PV IGN relay)
Measure 3 seconds after switching “OFF” the
0V
ignition switch.

When turning ignition switch ON. Battery voltage

Power supply
39 R/Y
(A/T PV IGN relay)
Measure 3 seconds after switching “OFF” the
0V
ignition switch.

48 B Ground Always 0V

Revision: August 2004 AT-206 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0882 TCM POWER INPUT SIGNAL

Diagnostic Procedure ECS00A6O

1. CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT A

1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)

2. Check voltage between TCM terminals and ground. B

Connector Terminal (Wire color) Voltage (Approx.)

F56 1 (L/B) - Ground 0 - 1.5V AT
27 (Y/R) - Ground
34 (Y) - Ground
F57 Battery voltage D
38 (R/Y) - Ground
39 (R/Y) - Ground
SCIA2930E
3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. E
4. Check voltage between TCM terminals and ground.
Connector Terminal (Wire color) Voltage (Approx.)
F
F56 1 (L/B) - Ground 0V
27 (Y/R) - Ground Battery voltage
34 (Y) - Ground 0V G
F57
38 (R/Y) - Ground 0V
39 (R/Y) - Ground 0V
H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
I
2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following: J
● Harness for short or open between battery and TCM terminal 27
● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and TCM terminals 1, 34, 38 and 39
● 10A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B) or No. 48, located in the IPDM E/R] K
● Ignition switch. Refer to PG-3, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT"
● A/T PV IGN relay. Refer to AT-208, "Component Inspection"
L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
M
3. CHECK TCM GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect TCM harness connector.
3. Check continuity between TCM terminals 14 (B), 48 (B) and
ground.
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors.

SCIA2933E

Revision: August 2004 AT-207 2005 Maxima

 DTC P0882 TCM POWER INPUT SIGNAL

4. CHECK DTC
Check again. Refer to AT-204, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 5.

5. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-71, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Component Inspection ECS00A6P

A/T PV IGN RELAY

1. Apply 12V direct current between A/T PV IGN relay terminals 1
and 2.
2. Check continuity between relay terminals 3 and 5.
Condition Continuity
12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 Yes
OFF No
3. If NG, replace A/T PV IGN relay.

SCIA1245E

Revision: August 2004 AT-208 2005 Maxima

 DTC P1726 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL SYSTEM

DTC P1726 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL SYSTEM PFP:23710

A
Description ECS00A6Q

This DTC is displayed with other DTCs regarding ECM. Perform the trouble diagnosis for other DTCs dis-
played. Refer to AT-44, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" . B
When this DTC is detected, lock-up operation and learning control are canceled.

AT

Revision: August 2004 AT-209 2005 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS PFP:00007

A/T CHECK Indicator Lamp does not come on ECS00A6R

SYMPTOM:
A/T CHECK indicator lamp does not come on for about 2 seconds when turning ignition switch to
“ON”.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
Perform the self-diagnosis. Is a malfunction in the CAN communication indicated in the results?
YES or NO
YES >> Check the CAN communication line. Refer to AT-83, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE"
.
NO >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
2. Check voltage between TCM connector terminals and ground.
Refer to AT-205, "Wiring Diagram — AT — PWR/IN" .
Connector Terminal (Wire color) Voltage (Approx.)
F56 1 (L/B) - Ground 0 - 1.5V
27 (Y/R) - Ground
34 (Y) - Ground
F57 Battery voltage
38 (R/Y) - Ground
39 (R/Y) - Ground
SCIA2930E
3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
4. Check voltage between TCM connector terminals and ground. Refer to AT-205, "Wiring Diagram — AT —
PWR/IN" .
Connector Terminal (Wire color) Voltage (Approx.)
F56 1 (L/B) - Ground 0V
27 (Y/R) - Ground Battery voltage
34 (Y) - Ground 0V
F57
38 (R/Y) - Ground 0V
39 (R/Y) - Ground 0V

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

Check the following:
● Harness for short or open between battery and TCM terminal 27
● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and TCM terminals 1, 34, 38 and 39
● 10A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B) or No. 48, located in the IPDM E/R]
● Ignition switch. Refer to PG-3, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
● A/T PV IGN relay. Refer to AT-208, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: August 2004 AT-210 2005 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

4. CHECK TCM GROUND CIRCUIT A

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect the TCM harness connector.
3. Check continuity between TCM terminals 14 (B), 48 (B) and B
ground. Refer to AT-205, "Wiring Diagram — AT — PWR/IN" .
4. If OK, check harness for short-circuit to ground or the power
source. AT
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power D
in harness or connectors.

E
SCIA2933E

5. CHECK A/T CHECK INDICATOR LAMP CIRCUIT

F
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check the combination meter. Refer to DI-5, "COMBINATION METERS" .
OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace the combination meter. Refer to DI-29, "Removal and Installation of Combination Meter" .
H
6. SYMPTOM CHECK
Check again.
OK or NG I
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 7.
J
7. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-71, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . K
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END L
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: August 2004 AT-211 2005 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

Engine Cannot Be Started In “P” or “N” Position ECS00A6S

SYMPTOM:
● Engine cannot be started with selector lever in “P” or “N” position.
● Engine can be started with selector lever in “D”or “R” position.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK STARTING SYSTEM
Check starting system. Refer to SC-10, "STARTING SYSTEM" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

2. CHECK CONTROL CABLE

Check the control cable.
● Refer to AT-240, "Control Cable Adjustment" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Adjust control cable. Refer to AT-240, "Control Cable Adjustment" .

3. CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT

Perform self-diagnosis.
Do the self-diagnostic results indicate PNP switch?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-90, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION
SWITCH" .
NO >> INSPECTION END
In “P” Position, Vehicle Moves When Pushed ECS00A6T

SYMPTOM:
Even though the selector lever is set in the “P” position, the parking mechanism is not actuated,
allowing the vehicle to be moved when it is pushed.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT
Perform self-diagnosis.
Do the self-diagnostic results indicate PNP switch?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-90, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION
SWITCH" .
NO >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK CONTROL CABLE

Check the control cable.
● Refer to AT-240, "Control Cable Adjustment" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Adjust control cable. Refer to AT-240, "Control Cable Adjustment" .

3. SYMPTOM CHECK
Check again.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: August 2004 AT-212 2005 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

In “N” Position, Vehicle Moves ECS00A6U

SYMPTOM: A
Vehicle moves forward or backward when selecting “N” position.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
B
1. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-54, "A/T FLUID CHECK" . AT
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Refill ATF. D
2. CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT
Perform self-diagnosis. E
Do the self-diagnostic results indicate PNP switch?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-90, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION
SWITCH" . F
NO >> GO TO 3.

3. CHECK CONTROL CABLE G

Check the control cable.
● Refer to AT-240, "Control Cable Adjustment" .
H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Adjust control cable. Refer to AT-240, "Control Cable Adjustment" .
I
4. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again. J
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 4. K

5. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-71, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . L
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
M
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: August 2004 AT-213 2005 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

Large Shock (“N” to “D” Position) ECS00A6V

SYMPTOM:
A noticeable shock occurs when the selector lever is shifted from the “N” to “D” position.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-54, "A/T FLUID CHECK" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Refill ATF.

2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS

Perform self-diagnosis.
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system.
NO >> GO TO 3.

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

1. Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-241, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-252, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check the following items:
– Accumulator. Refer to AT-252, "DISASSEMBLY" .
– Forward and direct clutch assembly. Refer to AT-252, "DISASSEMBLY" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

4. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-71, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

5. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: August 2004 AT-214 2005 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position ECS00A6W

SYMPTOM: A
The vehicle does not creep in the “R” position. Or an extreme lack of acceleration is observed.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
B
1. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-54, "A/T FLUID CHECK" . AT
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Refill ATF. D
2. CHECK CONTROL CABLE AND PNP SWITCH POSITION
Check the control cable and PNP switch position. E
● Refer to AT-240, "Control Cable Adjustment" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. F
NG >> Adjust control cable and PNP switch position. Refer to AT-240, "Control Cable Adjustment" or AT-
238, "Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment" .
G
3. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Perform self-diagnosis.
H
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system.
NO >> GO TO 4.
I
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
1. Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-241, "Control Valve Assembly" . J
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-252, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check the following items:
– Forward and direct clutch assembly. Refer to AT-252, "DISASSEMBLY" . K
– 1st and reverse brake. Refer to AT-252, "DISASSEMBLY" .
– B5 brake. Refer to AT-280, "Transaxle Case Cover & B5 Brake" .
L
– Torque convertor. Refer to AT-252, "DISASSEMBLY" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. M
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

5. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-71, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

6. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: August 2004 AT-215 2005 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D” Position ECS00A6X

SYMPTOM:
Vehicle does not creep forward when selecting “D” position.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-54, "A/T FLUID CHECK" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Refill ATF.

2. CHECK CONTROL CABLE AND PNP SWITCH POSITION

Check the control cable and PNP switch position.
● Refer to AT-240, "Control Cable Adjustment" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Adjust control cable and PNP switch position. Refer to AT-240, "Control Cable Adjustment" or AT-
238, "Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment" .

3. CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A CIRCUIT

Perform self-diagnosis.
Do the self-diagnostic results indicate pressure control solenoid valve A?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-144, "DTC P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLE-
NOID VALVE A (LINE PRESSURE)" .
NO >> GO TO 4.

4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

1. Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-241, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-252, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check the following items:
– Forward and direct clutch assembly. Refer to AT-252, "DISASSEMBLY" .
– One-way clutch No.2. Refer to AT-252, "DISASSEMBLY" .
– B5 brake. Refer to AT-280, "Transaxle Case Cover & B5 Brake" .
– Torque convertor. Refer to AT-252, "DISASSEMBLY" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

5. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-71, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

6. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: August 2004 AT-216 2005 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1 ECS00A6Y

SYMPTOM: A
Vehicle cannot be started from D1 on cruise test - Part 1.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
B
1. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Check if vehicle creeps in “R” position. AT
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Refer to AT-215, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position" . D
2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Perform self-diagnosis. E
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system.
NO >> GO TO 3. F

3. CHECK LINE PRESSURE

G
Check the line pressure at the engine stall point. Refer to AT-56, "LINE PRESSURE TEST" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. H
NG >> Check the malfunctioning item. Refer to AT-57, "Judgement of line pressure test" .

4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

I
1. Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-241, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-252, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check the following items: J
– Forward and direct clutch assembly. Refer to AT-252, "DISASSEMBLY" .
– One-way clutch No.2. Refer to AT-252, "DISASSEMBLY" .
K
– B5 brake. Refer to AT-280, "Transaxle Case Cover & B5 Brake" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. L
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

5. CHECK TCM
M
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-71, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

6. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 ECS00A6Z

SYMPTOM:
The vehicle does not shift-up from the D1 to D2 gear at the specified speed.

Revision: August 2004 AT-217 2005 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Check if vehicle creeps forward in “D” position and vehicle can be started from D1.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Refer to AT-216, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D” Position" , AT-217, "Vehicle Cannot Be
Started From D1" .

2. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL

Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-54, "A/T FLUID CHECK" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Refill ATF.

3. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS

Perform self-diagnosis.
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system.
NO >> GO TO 4.

4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

1. Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-241, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-252, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check the following items:
– One-way clutch No.1. Refer to AT-278, "One-Way Clutch Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake
Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1" .
– One-way clutch No.2. Refer to AT-252, "DISASSEMBLY" .
– 2nd coast brake. Refer to AT-272, "Oil Pump, 2nd Coast Brake & 2nd Brake" , AT-278, "One-Way Clutch
Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1" .
– 2nd brake. Refer to AT-272, "Oil Pump, 2nd Coast Brake & 2nd Brake" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

5. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-71, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

6. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3 ECS00A70

SYMPTOM:
The vehicle does not shift-up from D2 to D3 gear at the specified speed.

Revision: August 2004 AT-218 2005 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
A
1. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Check if vehicle creeps forward in “D” position and vehicle can be started from D1.
OK or NG B
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Refer to AT-216, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D” Position" ,AT-217, "Vehicle Cannot Be
Started From D1" . AT

2. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL

D
Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-54, "A/T FLUID CHECK" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. E
NG >> Refill ATF.

3. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS

F
Perform self-diagnosis.
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. G
NO >> GO TO 4.

4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM H

1. Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-241, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-252, "DISASSEMBLY" .
I
3. Check the following items:
– U/D brake. Refer to AT-252, "DISASSEMBLY" .
– B5 brake. Refer to AT-280, "Transaxle Case Cover & B5 Brake" . J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. K
5. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-71, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . L
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
M
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

6. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4 ECS00A71

SYMPTOM:
● The vehicle does not shift-up from the D3 to D4 gear at the specified speed.

Revision: August 2004 AT-219 2005 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Check if vehicle creeps forward in “D” position and vehicle can be started from D1.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Refer to AT-216, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D” Position" , AT-217, "Vehicle Cannot Be
Started From D1" .

2. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL

Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-54, "A/T FLUID CHECK" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Refill ATF.

3. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS

Perform self-diagnosis.
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system.
NO >> GO TO 4.

4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

1. Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-241, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-252, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check the following items:
– U/D brake. Refer to AT-252, "DISASSEMBLY" .
– U/D clutch. Refer to AT-252, "DISASSEMBLY" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

5. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-71, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

6. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
A/T Does Not Shift: D4 → D5 ECS00A72

SYMPTOM:
● The vehicle does not shift-up from the D4 to D5 gear at the specified speed.

Revision: August 2004 AT-220 2005 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
A
1. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Check if vehicle creeps forward in “D” position and vehicle can be started from D1.
OK or NG B
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Refer to AT-216, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D” Position" ,AT-217, "Vehicle Cannot Be
Started From D1" . AT

2. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL

D
Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-54, "A/T FLUID CHECK" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. E
NG >> Refill ATF.

3. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS

F
Perform self-diagnosis.
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. G
NO >> GO TO 4.

4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM H

1. Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-241, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-252, "DISASSEMBLY" .
I
3. Check the following items:
– Forward and direct clutch assembly. Refer to AT-252, "DISASSEMBLY" .
– 2nd coast brake. Refer to AT-272, "Oil Pump, 2nd Coast Brake & 2nd Brake" , AT-278, "One-Way Clutch J
Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1" .
– One-way clutch No.1. Refer to AT-278, "One-Way Clutch Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake
Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1" .
K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. L
5. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-71, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . M
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

6. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up ECS00A73

SYMPTOM:
A/T does not perform lock-up at the specified speed.

Revision: August 2004 AT-221 2005 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-54, "A/T FLUID CHECK" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Refill ATF.

2. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT

Check the stop lamp switch circuit. Refer to BRC-12, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" (with ABS), BRC-53, "TROU-
BLE DIAGNOSIS" (with TCS/ABS) or BRC-96, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" (with VDC/TCS/ABS).
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

3. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS

Perform self-diagnosis.
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system.
NO >> GO TO 4.

4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

1. Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-241, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-252, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check the following items:
– Torque converter. Refer to AT-252, "DISASSEMBLY" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

5. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-71, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

6. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition ECS00A74

SYMPTOM:
The lock-up condition cannot be maintained for more than 30 seconds.

Revision: August 2004 AT-222 2005 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
A
1. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-54, "A/T FLUID CHECK" .
OK or NG B
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Refill ATF.
AT
2. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT
Check the stop lamp switch circuit. Refer to BRC-12, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" (with ABS), BRC-53, "TROU-
D
BLE DIAGNOSIS" (with TCS/ABS) or BRC-96, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" (with VDC/TCS/ABS).
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. E
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

3. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS

F
Perform self-diagnosis.
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. G
NO >> GO TO 4.

4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM H

1. Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-241, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-252, "DISASSEMBLY" .
I
3. Check the following items:
– Torque converter. Refer to AT-252, "DISASSEMBLY" .
OK or NG J
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

5. CHECK TCM K

1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-71, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. M

6. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Lock-up Is Not Released ECS00A75

SYMPTOM:
The lock-up condition cannot be cancelled even after releasing the accelerator pedal.

Revision: August 2004 AT-223 2005 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-54, "A/T FLUID CHECK" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Refill ATF.

2. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT

Check the stop lamp switch circuit. Refer to BRC-12, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" (with ABS), BRC-53, "TROU-
BLE DIAGNOSIS" (with TCS/ABS) or BRC-96, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" (with VDC/TCS/ABS).
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

3. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS

Perform self-diagnosis.
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system.
NO >> GO TO 4.

4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

1. Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-241, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-252, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check the following items:
– Torque converter. Refer to AT-252, "DISASSEMBLY" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

5. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-71, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

6. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Cannot Be Changed to Manual Mode ECS00A76

SYMPTOM:
Does not change to manual mode when manual shift gate is used.

Revision: August 2004 AT-224 2005 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
A
1. CHECK MANUAL MODE SWITCH CIRCUIT
Check the manual mode switch circuit. Refer to AT-198, "DTC P0826 MANUAL MODE SWITCH CIRCUIT" .
OK or NG B
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
AT
2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Perform self-diagnosis.
D
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system.
NO >> INSPECTION END E
A/T Does Not Shift: 5th gear → 4th gear ECS00A77

SYMPTOM:
When shifted from 5M to 4M position in manual mode, does not downshift from 5th to 4th gear. F
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL G

Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-54, "A/T FLUID CHECK" .
OK or NG H
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Refill ATF.

2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS I

Perform self-diagnosis.
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic? J
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system.
NO >> GO TO 3.
K
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
1. Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-241, "Control Valve Assembly" .
L
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-252, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check the following items:
– Forward and direct clutch assembly. Refer to AT-252, "DISASSEMBLY" . M
– 2nd coast brake. Refer to AT-272, "Oil Pump, 2nd Coast Brake & 2nd Brake" , AT-278, "One-Way Clutch
Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1" .
– One-way clutch No.1. Refer to AT-278, "One-Way Clutch Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake
Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

4. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-71, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: August 2004 AT-225 2005 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

5. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
A/T Does Not Shift: 4th gear → 3rd gear ECS00A78

SYMPTOM:
When shifted from 4M to 3M position in manual mode, does not downshift from 4th to 3rd gear.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-54, "A/T FLUID CHECK" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Refill ATF.

2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS

Perform self-diagnosis.
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system.
NO >> GO TO 3.

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

1. Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-241, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-252, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check the following items:
– U/D clutch. Refer to AT-252, "DISASSEMBLY" .
– U/D brake. Refer to AT-252, "DISASSEMBLY" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

4. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-71, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

5. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
A/T Does Not Shift: 3rd gear → 2nd gear ECS00A79

SYMPTOM:
When shifted from 3M to 2M position in manual mode, does not downshift from 3rd to 2nd gear.

Revision: August 2004 AT-226 2005 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
A
1. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-54, "A/T FLUID CHECK" .
OK or NG B
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Refill ATF.
AT
2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Perform self-diagnosis.
D
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system.
NO >> GO TO 3. E
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
1. Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-241, "Control Valve Assembly" . F
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-252, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check the following items:
– U/D brake. Refer to AT-252, "DISASSEMBLY" . G
– B5 brake. Refer to AT-280, "Transaxle Case Cover & B5 Brake" .
OK or NG
H
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

4. CHECK TCM I

1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-71, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. K

5. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again. L
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
M
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
A/T Does Not Shift: 2nd gear → 1st gear ECS00A7A

SYMPTOM:
When shifted from 2M to 1M position in manual mode, does not downshift from 2nd to 1st gear.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-54, "A/T FLUID CHECK" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Refill ATF.

Revision: August 2004 AT-227 2005 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS

Perform self-diagnosis.
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system.
NO >> GO TO 3.

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

1. Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-241, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-252, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check the following items:
– 2nd coast brake. Refer to AT-272, "Oil Pump, 2nd Coast Brake & 2nd Brake" , AT-278, "One-Way Clutch
Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1" .
– 2nd brake. Refer to AT-272, "Oil Pump, 2nd Coast Brake & 2nd Brake" .
– One-way clutch No.1. Refer to AT-278, "One-Way Clutch Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake
Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1" .
– One-way clutch No.2. Refer to AT-252, "DISASSEMBLY" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

4. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-71, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

5. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake ECS00A7B

SYMPTOM:
No engine brake is applied when the gear is shifted from the 2nd to 1st gear.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-54, "A/T FLUID CHECK" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Refill ATF.

2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS

Perform self-diagnosis.
Do the self-diagnostic results indicate shift solenoid valve E, electric throttle control system?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-174, "DTC P0770 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E" ,
AT-209, "DTC P1726 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL SYSTEM" .
NO >> GO TO 3.

Revision: August 2004 AT-228 2005 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM A

1. Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-241, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-252, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check the following items: B
– 2nd coast brake. Refer to AT-272, "Oil Pump, 2nd Coast Brake & 2nd Brake" , AT-278, "One-Way Clutch
Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1" .
– U/D brake. Refer to AT-252, "DISASSEMBLY" . AT
– B5 brake. Refer to AT-280, "Transaxle Case Cover & B5 Brake" .
OK or NG
D
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

4. CHECK TCM E

1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-71, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. G

5. CHECK SYMPTOM
H
Check again.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
I
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate ECS00A7C

SYMPTOM: J
A/T CHECK indicator lamp does not come on in TCM self-diagnostic procedure even if the lamp circuit
is good.
DESCRIPTION K
● Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
The park/neutral (PNP) switch assembly includes a transmission range switch. The transmission range
switch detects the selector lever position and sends a signal to the TCM. L
● Stop lamp switch signal
Detects the brake pedal state (stop lamp switch is ON or OFF) and sends a signal via CAN communica-
tion line to the TCM. M
● Closed throttle position signal
ECM judges throttle opening based on a signal from accelerator pedal position sensor, and sends the sig-
nal via CAN communication line to TCM.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK PARK/ NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH CIRCUIT
Check the park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit. Refer to AT-90, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSI-
TION SWITCH" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: August 2004 AT-229 2005 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

2. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT

Perform self-diagnosis for ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-12, "TROUBLE DIAG-
NOSIS" (with ABS), BRC-53, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" (with TCS/ABS) or BRC-96, "TROUBLE DIAGNO-
SIS" (with VDC/TCS/ABS).
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

3. CHECK CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT

Perform self-diagnosis for ECM. Refer to EC-50, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

4. CHECK DATA MONITOR (WITH CONSULT-II)

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II.
3. Depress or release accelerator pedal and read out ON/OFF sig-
naling action of the “CLSD THL POS”.
4. Depress or release brake pedal and read out ON/OFF signaling
action of the “BRAKE SW”.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 5.

SCIA2946E

5. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-71, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

6. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE

Check the CAN communication line. Refer to AT-83, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

7. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Replace the TCM.

Revision: August 2004 AT-230 2005 Maxima

 SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM

SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM PFP:34901

A
Control Device ECS00A7D

AT

WCIA0435E

Revision: August 2004 AT-231 2005 Maxima

 SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM

Control Cable ECS00A7E

BBIA0271E

Revision: August 2004 AT-232 2005 Maxima

 A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM

A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM PFP:34950

A
Description ECS00A7F

● The electrical key interlock mechanism also operates as a shift lock:

With the key switch turned to ON, the selector lever cannot be shifted from “P” (parking) to any other posi- B
tion unless the brake pedal is depressed.
With the key removed, the selector lever cannot be shifted from “P” to any other position.
The key cannot be removed unless the selector lever is placed in “P”.
AT
● The shift lock and key interlock mechanisms are controlled by the ON-OFF operation of the shift lock sole-
noid and by the operation of the rotator and slider located inside the key cylinder.
Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location ECS00A7G D

L
BBIA0268E

Revision: August 2004 AT-233 2005 Maxima

 A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM

Wiring Diagram — AT — SHIFT ECS00A7H

BCWA0294E

Revision: August 2004 AT-234 2005 Maxima

 A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM

Shift Lock Control Unit Reference Values ECS00A7I

SHIFT LOCK HARNESS CONNECTOR TERMINAL LAYOUT A

AT

D
LCIA0087E

SHIFT LOCK CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION TABLE E

Data are reference values.
Terminal No.
(Wire color) Item Condition Judgement standard
F
(+) (-)
1 (Y/R) 8 (B) Power source Always Battery voltage
The position when the key is inserted and the selector G
lever is set to a position other than the “P” position, or Battery voltage
2 (BR/Y) 8 (B) Detent switch (key) when it is shifted from the “R” to the “P” position
Except the above Approx. 0V H
When brake pedal is depressed Battery voltage
4 (P/L) 8 (B) Stop lamp switch
When brake pedal is released Approx. 0V
Vehicle speed sig- I
5 (BR) 8 (B) — —
nal
Ignition switch: “ON” Battery voltage
6 (G) 8 (B) Ignition signal J
Ignition switch: “OFF” Approx. 0V
When the brake pedal is depressed Battery voltage
7 (R/W) 8 (B) Shift lock solenoid Ignition switch: “ON” and vehicle speed is less than 8 km/
Approx. 0V K
h (5 MPH)
8 (B) – Ground Always Approx. 0V
When the selector lever is set to a position other than the Battery voltage for approx. L
9 (R) 8 (B) Key lock signal “P” position 0.1 sec. (Note)
Except the above Approx. 0V

When the selector lever is set to the“ P” position

Battery voltage for approx. M
10 (W/G) 8 (B) Key unlock signal 0.1 sec. (Note)
Except the above Approx. 0V
NOTE:
Make sure that the pointer swings only momentarily because the output time is so short. If the inspection is done with an oscilloscope, it
should be observed that the power source voltage lasts for 3.5 to 10 ms.

Revision: August 2004 AT-235 2005 Maxima

 A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM

Component Inspection ECS00A7J

SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID

● Check operation by applying battery voltage to A/T device con-
nector.
CAUTION:
Be sure to apply the voltage of the correct polarity to the
respective terminals. Otherwise, the part may be damaged.
Connector Terminal
M34 9 (Battery voltage) - 10 (Ground)

SCIA3117E

DETENT SWITCH
For Key:
● Check continuity between terminals of the A/T device connector.
Condition Connector Terminal Continuity
The position when the selector lever is set
to a position other than the “P” position, or
Yes
when it is shifted from the “R” to the “P” M34 5-6
position
Except the above No

SCIA3118E

KEY LOCK SOLENOID

Key Lock
● Check operation by applying battery voltage to key switch and
key lock solenoid connector.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to cause burnout of the harness.
Connector Terminal
M26 1 (Battery voltage) - 2 (Ground)

WCIA0455E

Key Unlock
● Check operation by applying battery voltage to key switch and
key lock solenoid connector.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to cause burnout of the harness.
Connector Terminal
M26 2 (Battery voltage) - 1 (Ground)

WCIA0456E

Revision: August 2004 AT-236 2005 Maxima

 A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM

KEY SWITCH
● Check continuity between terminals of the key switch and key A
lock solenoid connector.
Condition Connector Terminal Continuity
B
Key inserted Yes
M27 3-4
Key removed No

AT

WCIA0457E
D

STOP LAMP SWITCH

● Check continuity between terminals of the stop lamp switch con- E
nector.
Condition Connector Terminal Continuity
When brake pedal is depressed Yes F
E38 1-2
When brake pedal is released No

Check stop lamp switch after adjusting brake pedal. Refer to BR-6,
G
"Inspection and Adjustment" .

PCIA0055E H

Revision: August 2004 AT-237 2005 Maxima

 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE

ON-VEHICLE SERVICE PFP:00000

Revolution Sensor Replacement ECS00BTV

1. Remove intake air duct. Refer to EM-15, "REMOVAL" .

2. Disconnect electrical connector.
3. Remove revolution sensor from A/T.
4. Reinstall any part removed.
NOTE:
● Do not reuse seal bolt.

BBIA0272E

Turbine Revolution Sensor Replacement ECS00BTW

1. Remove battery and bracket. Refer to SC-9, "REMOVAL" .

2. Disconnect electrical connector.
3. Remove bolt, and turbine revolution sensor from A/T.
4. Reinstall any part removed.
NOTE:
● Do not reuse seal bolt.

BBIA0273E

Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment ECS00BTX

1. Remove battery and bracket. Refer to SC-9, "REMOVAL" .

2. Remove cable from range lever.
3. Set range lever in neutral position.
4. Remove range lever and install alignment tool (J-45404).
5. Loosen park/neutral position (PNP) switch bolts.
6. Adjust park/neutral position (PNP) switch so that alignment tool
(J-45404) pointer aligns with neutral base line on park/neutral
position (PNP) switch body.

SCIA2800E

7. Tighten park/neutral position (PNP) switch bolts.

8. Reinstall range lever and cable.
9. Adjust control cable. Refer to AT-240, "Control Cable Adjust-
ment" .
10. Reinstall battery and bracket. Refer to SC-9, "INSTALLATION" .
11. Check continuity of park/neutral position (PNP) switch. Refer to
AT-94, "Component Inspection" .

BBIA0274E

Revision: August 2004 AT-238 2005 Maxima

 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE

ATF Cooler ECS00BTY

REMOVAL A
1. Drain ATF. Refer to MA-21, "Changing A/T Fluid" .
2. Drain engine coolant, refer to MA-14, "Changing Engine Coolant" .
3. Remove hose clamps and hoses from ATF cooler. B
4. Remove bolt from ATF cooler and remove ATF cooler.
INSTALLATION AT
Installation is the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
● Do not reuse sealing parts. D

F
BBIA0275E

ATF Cooler Valve ECS00BTZ

G
Refer to the figure for ATF cooler valve and hoses removal and installation information.

SCIA2975E

1. ATF cooler valve assembly 2. Hose clamp 3. Heater hose

4. Heater pipe 5. Outlet water hose 6. Hose clip
7. ATF cooler assembly 8. Transaxle assembly 9. Control cable bracket
10. Inlet water hose

Revision: August 2004 AT-239 2005 Maxima

 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE

COMPONENT INSPECTION
1. Make sure that ATF cooler valve is fully opened at room temper-
ature.
Dimension “A”: More than 72.0 mm (2.835 in)
A: Distance between ATF cooler valve port end face
and valve shaft end face.

SCIA2711J

2. Submerge ATF cooler valve in a water-filled container, and then

heat it up with temperature of over 82°C (180°F) for 10 minutes
more.

SCIA2993E

3. Make sure that ATF cooler valve is fully closed.

Dimension “A”: Less than 66.5 mm (2.618 in)
A: Distance between ATF cooler valve port end face
and valve shaft end face.

SCIA2711J

Control Cable Adjustment ECS00BU0

Move selector lever from the P position to the D position. You should
be able to feel the detent in each position. If the detent cannot be felt
or the pointer indicating the position is improperly aligned, the control
cable needs adjustment.
1. Place selector lever in the P position.
CAUTION:
Turn wheels more than 1/4 turn and apply the parking brake.
2. Loosen control cable lock nut.
3. Using the specified force, push control cable in the direction of
the arrow shown. BBIA0279E

Specified force : 9.8 N (1.0 kg, 2.2 lb)

4. Tighten control cable lock nut.
5. Move selector lever from P to D position. Make sure that selector lever moves smoothly.
● Make sure that the starter operates when the selector lever is placed in the N or P position.

● Make sure that the transmission is locked properly when the selector lever is placed in the P
position.

Revision: August 2004 AT-240 2005 Maxima

 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE

Side cover ECS00BU1

REMOVAL A
1. Remove engine under cover using power tools.
2. Drain ATF. Refer to MA-21, "Changing A/T Fluid" .
3. Remove side cover bolts and side cover. B
NOTE:
● Do not reuse side cover bolts
AT

SCIA4144E
F
INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse order of removal. Refer to AT-245, "Components" .
Control Valve Assembly ECS00BU2
G
REMOVAL
1. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-241, "Side cover" .
2. Disconnect solenoid valve connectors. H
3. Disconnect control valve assembly bolts and remove control
valve assembly.
I

K
SCIA4151E

L
INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse order of removal.
● Install bolts in sequence as shown. Refer to AT-245, "Compo- M
nents" for specified torque.
Bolt symbol Length mm (in) Number of bolts
A 55 (2.17) 2
B 50 (1.97) 2
C 16 (0.63) 2

SCIA4152E

Terminal cord assembly ECS00BU3

REMOVAL
1. Remove PNP switch. Refer to AT-245, "Components" .
2. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-241, "REMOVAL" .

Revision: August 2004 AT-241 2005 Maxima

 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE

3. Disconnect solenoid valve connectors.

4. Remove terminal cord assembly.

WCIA0238E

INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse order of removal.

Revision: August 2004 AT-242 2005 Maxima

 TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY PFP:32020

A
Removal and Installation ECS00BUS

REMOVAL
CAUTION: B
● When removing the transaxle assembly from engine, first remove the crankshaft position sensor
from the assembly.
● Be careful not to damage sensor edge.
AT
1. Drain engine coolant. Refer to MA-14, "Changing Engine Coolant" .
2. Remove battery and bracket. Refer to SC-9, "REMOVAL" .
3. Remove air cleaner assembly. Refer to EM-15, "Removal and Installation" . D
4. Disconnect terminal cord assembly harness connector and park/neutral position (PNP) switch harness
connectors.
5. Disconnect harness connectors of revolution sensor, ground, mass air flow sensor, and turbine revolution E
sensor.
6. Remove ATF cooler valve assembly bracket bolts.
7. Disconnect ATF cooler hose clips. F
8. Disconnect ATF cooler hoses from ATF cooler valve assembly.
9. Disconnect control cable at transaxle side.
10. Drain ATF. Refer to MA-21, "Changing A/T Fluid" . G
11. Remove engine undercover.
12. Remove upper transaxle to engine bolts.
H
13. Support engine. Refer to EM-116, "ENGINE ASSEMBLY" .
14. Remove drive shafts. Refer to FAX-11, "Removal and Installation" .
15. Remove crankshaft position sensor from transaxle. I
16. Support transaxle with a jack.
17. Remove starter motor from transaxle. Refer to SC-17, "Removal and Installation" .
18. Remove front suspension member. Refer to FSU-15, "Removal and Installation" . J
19. Remove rear cover plate and bolts securing torque converter to
drive plate.
● Rotate crankshaft for access to securing bolts. K
20. Remove lower transaxle to engine bolts.
21. Lower transaxle while supporting it with a jack.
22. If replacing the transaxle as a unit, remove the LH transaxle L
mount from the transaxle case.

M
BBIA0277E

INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ECS00BUT

● Drive plate runout

CAUTION:
Do not allow any magnetic materials to contact the ring
gear teeth.
Maximum allowable runout:
Refer to EM-147, "DRIVE PLATE RUNOUT (A/T)" .
● If this runout is out of allowance, replace drive plate and ring
gear.
SAT977H

Revision: August 2004 AT-243 2005 Maxima

 TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY

INSTALLATION
1. When connecting torque converter to transaxle, measure dis-
tance “A” to be certain that they are correctly assembled.
Distance “A” : 14.0 mm (0.551 in) or more

SAT044A

2. Install bolts converter to drive plate.

Converter bolt : 49 - 58 N·m (5.0 - 5.9 kg-m, 37 - 42 ft-lb)
NOTE:
With converter installed, rotate crankshaft several turns to check
that transaxle rotates freely without binding.

WCIA0070E

3. Tighten bolts securing transaxle.

Tightening torque
Bolt No. mm (in)
N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
1 70 - 79 (7.2 - 8.0, 52 - 58) 55 (2.17)
2 41.2 - 52.0 (4.2 - 5.3, 31 - 38) 40 (1.57)
3 70 - 79 (7.2 - 8.0, 52 - 58) 55 (2.17)

4. Tighten LH mounting bracket bolts to the specified torque. Refer

to EM-116, "Removal and Installation" .
5. Tighten front suspension member bolts to the specified torque. SCIA3017E

Refer to FSU-15, "Removal and Installation" .

6. Tighten rear plate cover bolts to the specified torque. Refer to EM-30, "Removal and Installation" .
7. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal.
● Check fluid level in transaxle.

● Move selector lever through all positions to be sure that tran-

saxle operates correctly.
● With parking brake applied, rotate engine at idling. Move
selector lever through N to D and to R position. A slight shock
should be felt by hand gripping selector each time transaxle is
shifted.
● When replacing the A/T assembly, initialize TCM. Refer to AT-
8, "Precautions for A/T Assembly or TCM Replacement" .
● Perform road test. Refer to AT-57, "ROAD TEST" .
SAT638A

Revision: August 2004 AT-244 2005 Maxima

 OVERHAUL

OVERHAUL PFP:00000
A
Components ECS00BU6

AT

WCIA0334E

Revision: August 2004 AT-245 2005 Maxima

 OVERHAUL

1. Adjust shim 2. O-ring 3. Differential gear assembly

4. O-ring 5. Tapered roller bearing 6. Tapered roller bearing
7. Outer race 8. O-ring 9. Compression spring
10. U/D brake piston assembly 11. U/D brake damper assembly 12. Snap ring
13. U/D brake band assembly 14. U/D clutch assembly 15. U/D gear assembly
16. Thrust needle roller bearing 17. Thrust bearing race 18. Seal ring
19. Transaxle case 20. B5 brake cushion plate 21. B5 brake disc
22. Snap ring 23. U/D RR planetary ring gear sub assembly 24. Thrust bearing race
25. U/D RR planetary carrier assembly 26. Thrust needle roller bearing 27. Thrust bearing race
28. B5 brake flange 29. B5 brake plate 30. O-ring
31. Snap ring 32. Return spring 33. B5 brake piston
34. Transaxle case cover

Revision: August 2004 AT-246 2005 Maxima

 OVERHAUL

AT

WCIA0385E

1. Snap ring 2. 2nd brake plate 3. Return spring

4. O-ring 5. Oil pump assembly 6. Oil seal
7. 2nd brake piston 8. 2nd brake sleeve 9. Snap ring

Revision: August 2004 AT-247 2005 Maxima

 OVERHAUL

10. 2nd brake disc 11. 2nd brake flange 12. One-way clutch No.1
13. 2nd coast brake hub 14. Snap ring 15. 2nd coast brake plate
16. Snap ring 17. O-ring 18. 2nd coast brake piston
19. Return spring 20. 2nd coast brake disc 21. 2nd coast brake flange
22. Thrust washer 23. Thrust washer 24. Return spring
25. 1st and reverse brake piston 26. Thrust bearing race 27. Counter drive gear sub assembly
28. One-way clutch outer race sub assem- 29. Thrust washer 30. Snap ring
bly
31. Thrust bearing 32. O-ring 33. Snap ring
34. Planetary gear assembly 35. FR planetary ring gear assembly 36. Snap ring
37. 1st and reverse brake disc 38. 1st and reverse brake flange 39. 1st and reverse brake plate
1st and reverse brake flange 41. One-way clutch No.2 42. Thrust bearing
40.
43. Thrust bearing race 44. Thrust needle roller bearing 45. Seal ring
46. Forward and direct clutch assembly 47. Planetary sun gear sub assembly 48. Thrust bearing race
49. Thrust needle roller bearing 50. RR planetary ring gear assembly 51. Thrust needle roller bearing
52. Thrust bearing race

Revision: August 2004 AT-248 2005 Maxima

 OVERHAUL

AT

SCIA4096E

1. Transaxle case cover 2. Seal ring 3. Forward clutch accumulator piston

4. Compression spring 5. Accumulator cover 6. O-ring
7. Seal ring 8. Range lever 9. Washer plate

Revision: August 2004 AT-249 2005 Maxima

 OVERHAUL

10. PNP switch 11. Lock washer 12. Parking lock pawl
13. Torsion spring No.1 14. Parking lock pawl shaft 15. Spring guide sleeve
16. Torsion spring No.2 17. Parking lockpin sub assembly 18. U/D brake apply tube sub assembly
19. Tube clamp 20. Oil reservoir plate 21. Oil cleaner magnet
22. Tube clamp 23. Differential gear lube apply tube 24. Seal ring
25. Thrust roller bearing 26. Straight screw plug 27. O-ring
28. Straight screw plug 29. Differential side oil seal 30. Torque converter
31. Transaxle housing 32. O-ring 33. O-ring
34. Spring washer 35. Hexagon bolt 36. Washer
37. ATF cooler assembly 38. gasket 39. Drain plug
40. Breather hose 41. O-ring 42. A/T fluid charging pipe
43. A/T fluid level gauge 44. Manual valve lever sub assembly 45. Parking lock rod sub assembly
46. Control valve assembly 47. Suction cover gasket 48. Suction cover
49. Side cover 50. Seal bolt 51. Governor apply gasket
52. Sensor clamp 53. Transmission wire 54. Transaxle lube apply tube
55. Tube clamp 56. Tube clamp 57. U/D clutch apply tube sub assembly
58. Bearing race 59. Seal ring 60. Seal bolt
61. Turbine revolution sensor 62. Differential side oil seal 63. Manual valve oil seal
64. O-ring 65. Anchor bolt 66. Revolution sensor
67. Seal bolt 68. Governor apply gasket 69. Transaxle case
70. Oil reserver plate 71. Oil strainer sub assembly 72. Manual detent spring sub assembly
73. Parking lock pawl bracket 74. Governor apply gasket

Revision: August 2004 AT-250 2005 Maxima

 OVERHAUL

Locations of Needle Bearings, Bearing Races and Thrust Washers ECS00BU7

AT

SCIA4478E

Revision: August 2004 AT-251 2005 Maxima

 DISASSEMBLY

DISASSEMBLY PFP:31020

Disassembly ECS00BU8

1. Drain ATF through drain plug.

2. Remove torque converter by transaxle case it firmly and turning
while pulling straight out.

SCIA4134E

3. Remove A/T fluid level gauge.

4. Remove A/T fluid charging pipe.
5. Remove O-ring from A/T fluid charging pipe.
6. Remove air breather hose.
7. Remove A/T fluid cooler tube.

SCIA4135E

8. Remove turbine revolution sensor.

CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the turbine revolution sensor and
transaxle case.

SCIA4137E

9. Remove revolution sensor.

CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the revolution sensor and tran-
saxle case.

SCIA4136E

Revision: August 2004 AT-252 2005 Maxima

 DISASSEMBLY

10. Remove nut and range lever.

A

AT

SCIA4138E

D
11. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, pry off the lock washer.

G
SCIA4139E

12. Loosen nut and remove lock washer. H

13. Remove washer plate.

K
SCIA4140E

14. Remove PNP switch from transaxle case.

L
Bolt symbol Length mm (in) Number of bolts
A 20 (0.79) 1
B 33 (1.30) 1 M

SCIA4141E

Revision: August 2004 AT-253 2005 Maxima

 DISASSEMBLY

15. Remove hexagon bolt.

16. Remove ATF cooler assembly, washer and spring washer.
17. Remove O-rings from the ATF cooler assembly.
NOTE:
Do not reuse spring washer or O-rings.

SCIA4142E

18. Remove side cover.

CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage side cover and transaxle case.

SCIA4143E

NOTE:
Do not reuse seal bolts

SCIA4144E

Revision: August 2004 AT-254 2005 Maxima

 DISASSEMBLY

19. Disconnect solenoid connectors.

CAUTION: A
Be careful not to damage connector.

AT

G
SCIA4146E

20. Remove sensor clamp bolt.

H

SCIA4148E
K
21. Remove sensor clamp and A/T fluid temperature sensor.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage A/T fluid temperature sensor. L

SCIA4147E

22. Remove suction cover bolts.

SCIA4150E

Revision: August 2004 AT-255 2005 Maxima

 DISASSEMBLY

23. Remove suction cover and suction cover gasket.

SCIA4149E

24. Remove control valve assembly bolts from transaxle case.

Bolt symbol Length mm (in) Number of bolts
A 55 (2.17) 2
B 50 (1.97) 2
C 16 (0.63) 2

SCIA4152E

25. While holding control valve assembly, disconnect parking lock

rod sub assembly from manual valve lever sub assembly and
remove control valve assembly.
NOTE:
Shift position is “N”.

SCIA4153E

26. Remove governor apply gaskets.

SCIA4154E

Revision: August 2004 AT-256 2005 Maxima

 DISASSEMBLY

27. Remove terminal cord assembly.

CAUTION: A
Be careful not to damage solenoid connectors and A/T fluid
temperature sensor.
B

AT

SCIA4155E

D
28. Remove oil pump assembly bolts from transaxle case.

G
SCIA4156E

K
SCIA4157E

29. Remove oil pump assembly using Tool.

Tool number ST33290001 (J-34286) L

SCIA5359E

Revision: August 2004 AT-257 2005 Maxima

 DISASSEMBLY

30. Remove oil seal from oil pump assembly using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch oil pump assembly.

SCIA4396E

31. Remove one-way clutch outer race sub assembly.

32. Remove thrust washer.

SCIA4159E

33. Remove transaxle housing bolts from transaxle case.

Bolt symbol Length mm (in) Number of bolts
A 30 (1.18) 13
B 35 (1.38) 2
C 45 (1.77) 1
D* — 1
*:Torx bolt

SCIA4160E

SCIA5495E

34. Remove transaxle housing with a soft hammer.

SCIA4162E

Revision: August 2004 AT-258 2005 Maxima

 DISASSEMBLY

35. Remove governor apply gasket.

36. Remove seal ring. A

AT

SCIA4163E

D
37. Remove tube clamp bolt and clamp.

G
SCIA4164E

38. Remove differential gear lube apply tube using a suitable tool.
H
CAUTION:
Be careful not to bend or damage differential gear lube
apply tube.
Be careful not to damage transaxle housing. I

SCIA4165E
K
39. Remove oil reservoir plate.

SCIA4166E

40. Remove oil cleaner magnets from oil reservoir plate.

SCIA4167E

Revision: August 2004 AT-259 2005 Maxima

 DISASSEMBLY

41. Remove differential gear assembly.

SCIA4168E

42. Remove oil strainer sub assembly.

SCIA4169E

43. Remove oil reservoir plate.

SCIA4170E

44. Remove tube clamp.

SCIA4171E

45. Remove U/D brake apply tube sub assembly using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to bend or damage U/D brake apply tube sub
assembly.
Be careful not to damage transaxle case.

SCIA4172E

Revision: August 2004 AT-260 2005 Maxima

 DISASSEMBLY

46. Disconnect manual detent spring sub assembly from manual

valve lever sub assembly using a flat-bladed screwdriver or suit- A
able tool.

AT

SCIA4174E

D
47. Remove manual valve lever sub assembly from parking lock rod
sub assembly.
E

G
SCIA4175E

48. Remove parking lock rod sub assembly.

H

SCIA4176E
K
49. Remove bolts for manual detent spring sub assembly.
Bolt symbol Length mm (in) Number of bolts L
A 16.7 (0.657) 1
B 14.0 (0.551) 1
M

SCIA4177E

50. Remove manual detent spring sub assembly.

SCIA4178E

Revision: August 2004 AT-261 2005 Maxima

 DISASSEMBLY

51. Remove parking lock pawl shaft and torsion spring No.1.

SCIA4179E

52. Remove parking lock pawl bracket and parking lock pawl.

WCIA0341E

53. Remove parking lockpin sub assembly.

SCIA4181E

54. Remove spring guide sleeve and torsion spring No.2.

SCIA4182E

55. Remove manual valve oil seal using a flat-bladed screwdriver.

CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage transaxle case.

SCIA4183E

Revision: August 2004 AT-262 2005 Maxima

 DISASSEMBLY

56. Remove thrust needle roller bearing and thrust bearing race
from U/D gear assembly. A

AT

WCIA0338E
D
57. Remove U/D gear assembly.
58. Remove seal rings from U/D gear assembly.
E

G
SCIA4185E

59. Remove U/D clutch assembly. H

SCIA4186E K

60. Remove anchor bolt.

L

SCIA4193E

61. Remove U/D brake band assembly.

CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage transaxle case.

SCIA4187E

Revision: August 2004 AT-263 2005 Maxima

 DISASSEMBLY

62. Remove U/D RR planetary carrier assembly and thrust bearing

races.

SCIA5505E

63. Remove U/D RR planetary ring gear sub assembly.

64. Remove thrust needle roller bearing adjusting shim and thrust
bearing race from U/D RR planetary ring gear sub assembly.

WCIA0339E

65. Remove snap ring using a snap ring pliers

SCIA4190E

66. Remove U/D brake damper assembly.

67. Remove O-rings from U/D brake damper assembly.

SCIA4191E

68. Remove U/D brake piston assembly and compression spring.

69. Remove O-ring from U/D brake piston assembly.

SCIA4192E

Revision: August 2004 AT-264 2005 Maxima

 DISASSEMBLY

70. Remove transaxle case cover bolts from transaxle case.

A
Bolt symbol Length mm (in) Number of bolts
A 30 (1.18) 8
B 45 (1.77) 2 B
C 48 (1.89) 2
D* — 1
AT
*:Stud bolt

SCIA4194E
D

G
SCIA4195E

71. Tap transaxle case cover with a soft hammer.

CAUTION: H
Be careful not to damage transaxle case cover.

SCIA4196E
K
72. Remove transaxle case cover.

SCIA4197E

73. Remove governor apply gaskets from transaxle case.

NOTE:
Do not reuse gaskets

SCIA4198E

Revision: August 2004 AT-265 2005 Maxima

 DISASSEMBLY

74. Remove tube clamp bolt.

SCIA4199E

75. Remove transaxle lube apply tube, using a flat-bladed screw-

driver.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to bend or damage transaxle lube apply tube.
Be careful not to damage transaxle case.

SCIA4200E

76. Remove forward and direct clutch assembly.

77. Remove thrust bearing race, thrust needle roller bearing and
seal ring from forward and direct clutch assembly.
NOTE:
Do not reuse seal ring.

WCIA0384E

78. Remove planetary sun gear sub assembly and thrust needle
roller bearings.

SCIA5499E

79. Measure the inner diameter of planetary sun gear sub assembly
bushing, using suitable bore gauge.
CAUTION:
Measure at different places and take an average. If it is
greater than the maximum, replace it with a new planetary
sun gear sub assembly.
Standard :22.200 - 22.226mm (0.8740 - 0.8750in)
Allowable limit :22.276 (0.8770in)

SCIA4255E

Revision: August 2004 AT-266 2005 Maxima

 DISASSEMBLY

AT

SCIA4256E

80. Remove RR planetary ring gear assembly. D

81. Remove thrust needle roller bearing and thrust bearing race
from RR planetary ring gear assembly.
E

G
SCIA4203E

82. Remove planetary gear assembly.

83. Remove thrust bearing race from planetary gear assembly. H

SCIA4204E

K
84. Measure the inner diameter of planetary gear assembly bush-
ing, using suitable bore gauge.
CAUTION: L
Measure at different places and take an average. If it is
greater than the maximum, replace it with a new planetary
gear assembly.
M
Standard :30.056 - 30.082mm (1.1833 - 1.1843in)
Allowable limit :30.132 (1.1863in)

SCIA4254E

85. Remove thrust bearing.

SCIA4205E

Revision: August 2004 AT-267 2005 Maxima

 DISASSEMBLY

86. Remove snap ring using a flat-bladed screwdriver.

SCIA4206E

87. Remove 1st and reverse brake flanges, 1st and reverse brake
discs and 1st and reverse brake plates.
● INSPECTION

– Check that the sliding surface of discs are not worn and burnt.
If necessary, replace them.
CAUTION:
Replace new discs by soaking them at least 2 hours in A/T
fluid.

SCIA4207E

88. Remove FR planetary ring gear assembly with one-way clutch

No.2.

SCIA4208E

89. Make sure that the FR planetary ring gear assembly should turn
freely counterclockwise and should lock clockwise.

SCIA4414E

90. Remove snap ring using a flat-bladed screwdriver.

SCIA4209E

Revision: August 2004 AT-268 2005 Maxima

 DISASSEMBLY

91. Remove return spring.

A

AT

SCIA4210E
D
92. While pushing the piston by hand, apply compressed air (4Kg/
cm2 ) into the oil passage of transaxle case as shown in the fig-
E
ure and remove 1st and reverse brake piston.

SCIA4211E

93. Remove O-rings from 1st and reverse brake piston. H

NOTE:
Do not reuse O-Rings.
I

SCIA4212E
K

94. Remove thrust bearing and thrust bearing race from counter
drive gear sub assembly. L

SCIA4213E

95. Remove snap ring using a suitable snap ring pliers.

SCIA4214E

Revision: August 2004 AT-269 2005 Maxima

 DISASSEMBLY

96. Remove counter drive gear sub assembly.

SCIA4215E

97. Remove differential side oil seal from transaxle case and tran-
saxle housing using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch transaxle case and transaxle
housing.

SCIA4216E

NOTE:
Do not reuse oil seals

SCIA4217E

98. Remove outer race and adjust shim from transaxle case, using
Tool
Tool number : ST30612000 (J-25745-2)

SCIA5360E

Revision: August 2004 AT-270 2005 Maxima

 DISASSEMBLY

99. Remove thrust roller bearing from transaxle housing, using Tool.
A
Tool number : ST333290001 (J-34286)

AT

SCIA5361E

Revision: August 2004 AT-271 2005 Maxima

 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS PFP:00000

Oil Pump, 2nd Coast Brake & 2nd Brake ECS00BUU

COMPONENTS

SCIA4384E

1. Return spring 2. Snap ring 3. O-ring

4. Oil seal 5. Oil pump assembly 6. 2nd brake piston
7. 2nd brake sleeve 8. O-ring 9. 2nd brake flange
10. 2nd brake plate 11. 2nd brake disc 12. Snap ring
13. 2nd coast brake piston 14. Return spring 15. Thrust washer
16. 2nd coast brake flange 17. 2nd coast brake plate 18. Snap ring
19. 2nd coast brake disc 20. Snap ring

DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove oil seal from oil pump assembly, using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch oil pump assembly.
NOTE:
Do not reuse old seal.

SCIA4396E

Revision: August 2004 AT-272 2005 Maxima

 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

2. Remove thrust washer from oil pump assembly.

A

AT

SCIA4218E

D
3. Remove snap ring, using a flat-bladed screwdriver.

G
SCIA4219E

4. Remove 2nd coast brake flange, 2nd coast brake disc and 2nd
H
coast brake plate.

SCIA4220E
K
5. Compress return spring with a press, using Tool.
Tool number : KV31102400 (J-34285 and J-34285-87) L
6. Remove snap ring, using suitable snap ring pliers.

SCIA5362E

7. Remove return spring.

SCIA4222E

Revision: August 2004 AT-273 2005 Maxima

 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

8. While pushing the 2nd coast brake piston by hand, apply com-
pressed air (4kg/cm2 ) into the oil passage as shown and
remove 2nd coast brake piston.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the O-ring and 2nd coast brake
piston.
9. Remove O-rings from 2nd coast brake piston.
NOTE:
Do not reuse O-rings.
SCIA4223E

10. Remove snap ring, using suitable tool.

SCIA4224E

11. Remove 2nd brake flange, 2nd brake discs and 2nd brake
plates.

SCIA4225E

12. Remove return spring.

SCIA4226E

13. Remove snap ring, using suitable tool.

CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage oil pump assembly and 2nd brake
piston.

SCIA4227E

Revision: August 2004 AT-274 2005 Maxima

 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

14. While pushing the 2nd brake piston by hand, apply compressed
air (4kg/cm2 ) into the oil passage as shown and remove 2nd A
brake piston (With 2nd brake sleeve).
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage 2nd brake piston and 2nd brake B
sleeve.
15. Remove O-rings from 2nd brake piston and 2nd brake sleeve.
NOTE: AT
Do no reuse O-rings.
SCIA4228E
D
INSPECTION
● Check that the sliding surface of disc and plate is not worn or burnt. If the disc or plate is worn or burnt,
replace it E
NOTE:
Replace new clutch discs by soaking them at least 2 hours in ATF.
F
ASSEMBLY
1. Install new O-rings in 2nd brake sleeve and 2nd brake piston.
NOTE: G
● Do not reuse O-ring.

● Apply ATF to O-ring.

2. Coat the inner surfaces of oil pump assembly with ATF. H

3. Press 2nd brake piston and 2nd brake sleeve into oil pump
assembly.
I

SCIA4229E

J
4. Install snap ring, using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage oil pump assembly. K

M
SCIA4227E

5. Place return spring on 2nd brake piston with the spring side up.

SCIA4226E

Revision: August 2004 AT-275 2005 Maxima

 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

6. Install 2nd brake flange, 2nd brake discs and 2nd brake plates.

SCIA4225E

7. Install snap ring, using suitable tool.

SCIA4224E

8. Install new O-rings in 2nd coast brake piston.

NOTE:
● Do not reuse O-rings.

● Apply ATF to O-rings.

9. Coat the inner surfaces of oil pump assembly with ATF.

10. Press 2nd coast brake piston into oil pump assembly.

SCIA4230E

11. Install return spring.

SCIA4222E

12. Compress return spring, using Tool.

Tool number : KV31102400 (J-34285 and J-34285-87)
13. Install snap ring, using suitable snap ring pliers.

SCIA5362E

Revision: August 2004 AT-276 2005 Maxima

 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

14. Install 2nd coast brake flange, 2nd coast brake disc and 2nd
coast brake plate. A

AT

SCIA4220E
D
15. Compress return spring with a press, using Tool.
Tool number : KV31102400 (J-34285 and J-34285-87)
E
16. Install snap ring, using suitable tool.

G
SCIA5363E

17. Set a dial indicator as shown. H

2
18. When applying compressed air (4Kg/cm ) into the oil passage
as shown, measure 2nd brake piston stroke and check 2nd
brake piston moves smoothly. I
Piston stroke :1.10 - 1.50mm (0.0433 - 0.0591in)
If 2nd brake piston stroke is out standards, select another
flange. Refer to AT-314, "2ND BRAKE" . J

SCIA5501E K

19. Set a dial indicator as shown.

20. When applying compressed air (4Kg/cm2 ) into the oil passage L
as shown, measure 2nd coast brake piston stroke and check
2nd coast brake piston moves smoothly.
Piston stroke :0.76 - 1.44mm (0.0299 - 0.0567in) M

SCIA4233E

21. Install thrust washer facing the flat surface up.

NOTE:
Apply petroleum jelly to thrust washer.

SCIA4218E

Revision: August 2004 AT-277 2005 Maxima

 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

22. Install new oil seal into oil pump assembly until it is flush with the
oil pump face, using Tool.
Tool number : ST30720000 (J-25405)
NOTE:
● Do not reuse oil seal.
● Apply ATF to oil seal.

SCIA5364E

One-Way Clutch Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake Hub & One-Way
Clutch No.1 ECS00BUV

COMPONENTS

SCIA4234E

1. Thrust washer 2. One-way clutch outer race sub assembly 3. One-way clutch No.1
4. Thrust washer 5. 2nd coast brake hub

DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove thrust washer from one-way clutch outer race sub
assembly.

SCIA4235E

Revision: August 2004 AT-278 2005 Maxima

 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

2. Remove 2nd coast brake hub from one-way clutch outer race
sub assembly. A
3. Remove thrust washer from 2nd coast brake hub.

AT

SCIA4236E
D
4. Remove one-way clutch No.1 from one-way clutch outer race
sub assembly.
E

G
SCIA4237E

ASSEMBLY H
1. Install one-way clutch No.1 into the one-way clutch outer race
sub assembly.
CAUTION: I
Do not mistake the direction of one-way clutch No.1.

K
SCIA4238E

2. Install thrust washer into 2nd coast brake hub. L

NOTE:
● Coat the thrust washer with grease.

● Align the tab of the washer with the hollow of the 2nd coast M
brake hub.
3. Install 2nd coast brake hub into one-way clutch outer race sub
assembly.
NOTE:
While turning the 2nd coast brake hub, slide it into one-way
clutch outer race sub assembly. SCIA4236E

Revision: August 2004 AT-279 2005 Maxima

 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

4. Coat the thrust washer with petroleum jelly. Align the tab of the
washer with the hollow of the one-way clutch outer race sub
assembly.
NOTE:
Apply petroleum jelly to thrust washer.

SCIA4235E

INSPECTION
● Hold one-way clutch outer race sub assembly, and check that
2nd coast brake hub should turn freely clockwise and should
lock counterclockwise.

SCIA4239E

Transaxle Case Cover & B5 Brake ECS00BUW

COMPONENTS

SCIA5441E

Revision: August 2004 AT-280 2005 Maxima

 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

1. Transaxle case cover 2. Seal ring 3. O-ring

4. Return spring 5. Snap ring 6. B5 brake piston
A
7. Seal ring 8. Bearing race 9. U/D clutch apply tube sub assembly
10. Tube clamp 11. Forward clutch accumulator piston 12. Compression spring
B
13. Accumulator cover 14. O-ring 15. Seal ring
16. B5 brake cushion plate 17. B5 brake plate 18. B5 brake flange
19. Snap ring 20. B5 brake disc
AT
DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove tube clamps.
D

SCIA5502E

G
2. Remove U/D clutch apply tube sub assembly, using suitable
tool.
CAUTION: H
Be careful not to damage the U/D clutch apply tube sub
assembly and transaxle case cover.

J
SCIA4241E

3. Remove bearing race and seal rings from transaxle case cover.
K

WCIA0386E

4. Remove accumulator cover, compression spring and forward

clutch accumulator piston.
5. Remove O-ring from the accumulator cover.
NOTE:
Do not reuse O-rings.
6. Remove seal ring from the forward clutch accumulator piston.
NOTE:
Do not reuse seal ring.

SCIA4243E

Revision: August 2004 AT-281 2005 Maxima

 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

7. Remove snap ring, using suitable flat blade screwdriver.

SCIA4244E

8. Remove B5 brake flange, B5 brake discs, B5 brake plates and

B5 brake cushion plate.

SCIA4245E

9. Compress return spring, using Tool.

Tool number : KV31102400 (J-34285 and J-34285-87)
CAUTION:
Do not press return spring too much to avoid deformation.
10. Remove snap ring, using suitable tool.

SCIA5365E

11. Remove return spring.

SCIA4247E

12. While pushing B5 brake piston by hand, apply compressed air

(4Kg/cm2 ) into the oil passage as shown and remove B5 brake
piston.

SCIA4248E

Revision: August 2004 AT-282 2005 Maxima

 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

13. Remove O-rings from B5 brake piston.

NOTE: A
Do not reuse O-rings.
14. Remove seal ring from transaxle case cover.
B
NOTE:
Do not reuse seal ring.

AT

D
SCIA4249E

INSPECTION E
● Check that the sliding surface of disc and plate is not worn or burnt. If the disc or plate is worn or burnt,
replace it
NOTE: F
Replace new clutch discs by soaking them at least 2 hours in ATF.
ASSEMBLY
G
1. Install new seal ring in transaxle case cover.
NOTE:
● Do not reuse seal ring.
H
● Apply ATF to seal ring.

2. Install new O-rings in B5 brake piston.

NOTE: I
● Do not reuse O-rings.

● Apply ATF to O-rings.

3. Coat the inner surface of transaxle case cover with ATF. J

4. Press B5 brake piston into the transaxle case cover. SCIA4249E

5. Place return spring on B5 brake piston. K

SCIA4247E

6. Compress return spring with a press, using Tool.

Tool number : KV31102400 (J-34285 and J-34285-87)
CAUTION:
Do not press return spring too much to avoid deformation.
7. Install snap ring, using suitable tool.

SCIA5365E

Revision: August 2004 AT-283 2005 Maxima

 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

8. Install B5 brake cushion plate.

CAUTION:
Be sure direction of B5 brake cushion plate.
9. Install B5 brake flange, B5 brake plates and B5 brake discs as
shown.

SCIA4245E

10. Install snap ring, using suitable tool or flat-bladed screwdriver.

SCIA4244E

11. Install new O-ring in accumulator cover.

NOTE:
● Do not reuse O-ring.

● Apply ATF to O-ring.

12. Install new seal ring in forward clutch accumulator piston.

NOTE:
● Do not reuse seal ring.

● Apply ATF to seal ring.

13. Install forward clutch accumulator piston, compression spring

and accumulator cover in transaxle case cover. SCIA4243E

14. Tighten accumulator cover torx bolts to specified torque. Refer

to AT-280, "COMPONENTS" .

15. Install new seal rings and bearing race in transaxle case cover.
NOTE:
● Do not reuse seal ring.

● Apply ATF to O-ring.

● Refer to ASSEMBLY to select proper bearing race.

WCIA0386E

Revision: August 2004 AT-284 2005 Maxima

 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

16. Install the U/D clutch apply tube sub assembly, using suitable
soft hammer. A

AT

SCIA4252E

D
17. Tighten tube clamp bolts to specified torque. Refer to AT-280,
"COMPONENTS" .
E

G
SCIA5502E

18. Set a dial indicator as shown.

H
19. When applying compressed air (4Kg/cm2 ) into the oil passage
as shown, measure the B5 brake piston stroke and check the B5
brake piston moves smoothly. I
Piston stroke :2.34 - 2.70mm (0.0921 - 0.1063in)
If the B5 brake piston stroke is out standards, select another
flange. Refer to AT-315, "B5 BRAKE" . J

SCIA5503E
K
Differential Gear Assembly ECS00BUX

COMPONENTS
L

SCIA4407E

Revision: August 2004 AT-285 2005 Maxima

 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

1. O-ring 2. Tapered roller bearing 3. Differential gear assembly

4. Tapered roller bearing 5. O-ring

DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove O-rings from differential gear assembly.
NOTE:
Do not reuse O-rings.

SCIA4408E

2. Remove tapered roller bearings, using suitable puller and Tool.

Tool number : ST33081000 (J-8107-2)
NOTE:
Do not reuse tapered roller bearings.

SCIA5366E

Revision: August 2004 AT-286 2005 Maxima

 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

ASSEMBLY
1. Install new tapered roller bearings in differential gear assembly, A
using Tool.
Tool number : KV38100500 ( — )
B
: ST33720000 (J-25405)
NOTE:
Do not reuse tapered roller bearings.
AT

SCIA5368E

H
2. Install new O-rings in differential gear assembly.
NOTE:
● Do not reuse O-rings.
I
● Apply ATF to O-rings.

K
SCIA4408E

Revision: August 2004 AT-287 2005 Maxima

 ASSEMBLY

ASSEMBLY PFP:00000

Assembly (1) ECS00BUY

1. Install new differential side oil seal into transaxle case as speci-
fied using Tool.
Tool number : ST33400001 (J-26082)

Distance : 3.0 - 4.0 mm (0.118 - 0.157 in)

NOTE:
● Do not reuse differential side oil seal.
● Apply ATF to differential side oil seal.

SCIA5369E

SCIA4473E

2. Install counter drive gear sub assembly.

SCIA4215E

3. Install snap ring using snap ring pliers.

SCIA4214E

Revision: August 2004 AT-288 2005 Maxima

 ASSEMBLY

4. Install new O-rings in 1st and reverse brake piston.

NOTE: A
● Do not reuse O-rings.

● Apply ATF to O-rings.

5. Coat the inner surface of transaxle case with ATF. B

6. Install 1st and reverse brake piston in transaxle case.

AT

SCIA4212E

D
7. Put return spring on 1st and reverse brake piston.

G
SCIA4210E

8. Install the snap ring into groove while compressing the return
H
spring by hand using flat-bladed screwdriver or suitable tool.

SCIA4209E
K
9. Put thrust bearing race and thrust bearing on counter drive gear
sub assembly.
NOTE: L
Apply petroleum jelly to thrust and thrust bearing race.

SCIA4213E

10. Install FR planetary ring gear assembly with one-way clutch

No.2.

SCIA4208E

Revision: August 2004 AT-289 2005 Maxima

 ASSEMBLY

11. Install 1st and reverse brake flanges, 1st and reverse brake
discs and 1st and reverse brake plates.

SCIA4207E

12. Install snap ring using a flat-bladed screwdriver or suitable tool.

SCIA4206E

13. Set a dial indicator as shown.

14. Applying compressed air (4Kg/cm2 ) and measure the 1st and
reverse brake piston stroke.
Piston stroke : 1.39 - 2.21 mm (0.0547 - 0.0870 in)
In a case that is out of reference, check the following items:
● Oil pressure leak

● Damage of O-ring

● Wear damage of disc

SCIA4258E

15. Install thrust bearing.

NOTE:
Apply petroleum jelly to thrust bearing.

SCIA4205E

16. Install planetary gear assembly.

17. Install thrust bearing race in planetary gear assembly.
NOTE:
Apply petroleum jelly to thrust bearing race.

SCIA4204E

Revision: August 2004 AT-290 2005 Maxima

 ASSEMBLY

18. Install thrust needle roller bearing and thrust bearing race in RR
planetary ring gear assembly. A
NOTE:
Apply petroleum jelly to thrust needle roller bearing.
19. Install RR planetary ring gear assembly. B

AT

SCIA4203E

D
20. Install planetary sun gear sub assembly and thrust needle roller
bearing.
NOTE: E
Apply petroleum jelly to thrust needle roller bearing.

G
SCIA5499E

21. Install forward and direct clutch assembly.

H
22. Install thrust bearing race, thrust needle roller bearing and new
seal ring in forward and direct clutch assembly.
NOTE: I
● Do not reuse old seal ring.

● Apply ATF to seal ring.

● Apply petroleum jelly to thrust needle roller bearing and thrust

J
bearing race.

WCIA0384E
K
23. Check the distance of “A”.
Dimension “A” : 50.850 - 51.825 mm L
(2.0020 - 2.0404 in)
CAUTION:
If the distance is out of standards, adjust with in standards M
again.

SCIA4259E

24. Install transaxle lube apply tube using a soft hammer.

CAUTION:
Be careful not to bend and damage transaxle lube apply
tube.

SCIA4260E

Revision: August 2004 AT-291 2005 Maxima

 ASSEMBLY

25. Tighten tube clamp bolt to specified torque. Refer to AT-245,

"Components" .

SCIA4199E

26. Install new governor apply gaskets in transaxle case.

NOTE:
● Do not reuse gaskets.

● Apply petroleum jelly to gaskets.

SCIA4198E

27. Install transaxle case cover in transaxle case.

SCIA4197E

28. Tighten transaxle case cover bolts to specified torque. Refer to

AT-245, "Components" .
CAUTION:
Do not reuse seal bolts.
Bolt symbol Length mm (in) Number of bolts
A 30 (1.18) 8
B 45 (1.77) 2
C 48 (1.89) 2
D* — 1 SCIA4194E

*:Stud bolt

WCIA0340E

Revision: August 2004 AT-292 2005 Maxima

 ASSEMBLY

29. Tighten anchor bolt to specified torque. Refer to AT-245, "Com- A

ponents" .

AT

SCIA4193E
D
30. Install new O-ring in U/D brake piston assembly.
NOTE:
E
● Do not reuse O-rings.

● Apply ATF to O-rings.

31. Coat the inner surface of transaxle case with ATF.

F
32. Install compression spring and U/D brake piston assembly.

SCIA4192E

33. Install new O-rings in U/D brake damper assembly. H

NOTE:
● Do not reuse O-ring.

● Apply ATF to O-ring. I

34. Install U/D brake damper assembly.

SCIA4191E
K

35. Install snap ring using a snap ring pliers.

CAUTION: L
If the snap ring is deformed, replace it.

SCIA4190E

36. Install thrust needle roller bearing adjust shim and thrust bearing
race in U/D RR planetary ring gear sub assembly.
NOTE:
Apply petroleum jelly to adjust shim, thrust needle roller bearing
and thrust bearing race.
37. Install U/D RR planetary ring gear sub assembly.

WCIA0339E

Revision: August 2004 AT-293 2005 Maxima

 ASSEMBLY

38. Install U/D RR planetary carrier assembly and thrust bearing

races.
NOTE:
Apply petroleum jelly to bearing races.

SCIA5505E

39. Install U/D brake band assembly.

SCIA4187E

40. Measure the U/D brake piston stroke applying and releasing the
compressed air (4Kg/cm2 ) as shown.
Piston Stroke : 5.76 - 6.76 mm (0.2268 - 0.2661 in)

SCIA4263E

SCIA4625E

41. If the piston stroke is out of standards, select another U/D brake
piston. Refer to AT-315, "U/D BRAKE" .

SCIA4264E

Revision: August 2004 AT-294 2005 Maxima

 ASSEMBLY

Adjustment ECS00BUZ

ADJUST PRELOAD OF TAPERED ROLLER BEARING A

1. Install adjust shim and outer race in transaxle case using Tool.
Tool number : KV40100621 (J-25273)
B
: ST30022000 ( — )

AT

D
SCIA5370E

2. Install differential gear assembly in transaxle case. E

3. Install transaxle housing into transaxle case.

SCIA4265E
H
4. Tighten transaxle housing and transaxle case bolts to specified
torque. Refer to AT-245, "Components" .
CAUTION: I
Use old self-sealing bolts during preload checking and
adjustment procedures.
J
Bolt symbol Length mm (in) Number of bolts
A 30 (1.18) 13
B 35 (1.38) 2 K
C 45 (1.77) 1
SCIA4267E

D* — 1
L
*:Torx bolt

SCIA5495E

Revision: August 2004 AT-295 2005 Maxima

 ASSEMBLY

5. Measure turning torque of differential gear assembly using Tool.

Tool number : KV40102500 (J-28815)
: ST3127S000 (J-25765-A)
6. Turn differential gear assembly in both directions several times
to seat bearing rollers correctly.
Turning torque : 0.7 - 1.2 N·m
(New bearing) (0.08 - 0.12kg-m, 7 - 10 in-lb)
If the preload is not within specification, remove differential gear
assembly from transaxle case. Re-select adjust shim. Refer to SCIA5371E

AT-315, "DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARING ADJUSTING SHIMS"

.
Assembly (2) ECS00BV0

1. Remove transaxle housing and differential gear assembly from transaxle case.
2. Install U/D clutch assembly.

SCIA4186E

3. Install new seal rings in U/D gear assembly.

NOTE:
● Do not reuse seal rings.

● Apply ATF to seal rings.

4. Install U/D gear assembly.

SCIA4185E

5. Install thrust needle roller bearing and thrust bearing race in U/D
gear assembly.
NOTE:
Apply petroleum jelly to thrust needle roller bearing and thrust
bearing race.

WCIA0338E

Revision: August 2004 AT-296 2005 Maxima

 ASSEMBLY

a. Make sure that measurement ″E″ is within the specifications.

Specification ″E″ : 1.269 - 1.645 mm A
(0.0500 - 0.0648 in)

AT

SCIA5452E

D
NOTE:
″E″ is the height between the edge of the transaxle case and the
roller part of thrust needle roller bearing. E

SCIA5459E

H
b. If measurement ″E″ is outside the specification, replace ″T″ with
a one that has applicable thickness. Refer to AT-315, "U/D
BRAKE" .
I
CAUTION:
When adjusting ″T″, use ″S″ of thickness 0.81 mm (0.32 in).
c. If all of ″T″ do not fit ″E″ within the specifications, replace ″S″
with a one that has applicable thickness. Refer to AT-315, "U/D J
BRAKE" .
CAUTION:
When adjusting ″S″, use ″T″ of thickness 0.80 mm (0.31 in). K

SCIA5488E

Revision: August 2004 AT-297 2005 Maxima

 ASSEMBLY

d. Make sure that measurement ″E″ is within specifications.

SCIA5452E

6. Install new manual valve oil seal into transaxle case until it is
flush with the transaxle case face, using Tool.
Tool number : ST33061000 (J-8107-2)
NOTE:
● Do not reuse manual valve oil seal.
● Apply ATF to manual valve oil seal.

SCIA5486E

7. Install spring guide sleeve and torsion spring No.2 in transaxle

case.
8. Tighten spring guide sleeve and torsion spring No.2 torx bolt to
specified torque. Refer to AT-245, "Components" .

SCIA4182E

9. Install parking lockpin sub assembly.

SCIA4181E

10. Install parking lock pawl bracket and parking lock pawl.

WCIA0341E

Revision: August 2004 AT-298 2005 Maxima

 ASSEMBLY

11. Install parking lock pawl shaft and torsion spring No.1.
A

AT

SCIA4179E
D
12. Install manual detent spring sub assembly.

G
SCIA4178E

13. Temporary tightening the bolts. H

Bolt symbol Length mm (in) Number of bolts
A 16.7 (0.657) 1
I
B 14.0 (0.551) 1

SCIA4177E K

14. Install parking lock rod sub assembly.

L

SCIA4176E

15. Install manual valve lever sub assembly connect parking lock
rod sub assembly to it.

SCIA4175E

Revision: August 2004 AT-299 2005 Maxima

 ASSEMBLY

16. Connect manual detent spring sub assembly to manual valve

lever sub assembly using a flat-bladed screwdriver.

SCIA4174E

17. Tighten manual detent spring sub assembly bolts to specified

torque. Refer to AT-245, "Components" .

SCIA4550E

18. Install U/D brake apply tube sub assembly using a soft hammer.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage U/D brake apply tube sub assem-
bly.

SCIA4270E

19. Tighten tube clamp bolts to specified torque. Refer to AT-245,

"Components" .

SCIA4171E

20. Install oil reservoir plate in transaxle case.

21. Tighten oil reservoir plate bolts to specified torque. Refer to AT-
245, "Components" .

SCIA4170E

Revision: August 2004 AT-300 2005 Maxima

 ASSEMBLY

22. Install oil strainer sub assembly in transaxle case.

23. Tighten oil strainer sub assembly bolt to specified torque. Refer A
to AT-245, "Components" .

AT

SCIA4169E
D
24. Install differential gear assembly.

G
SCIA4168E

25. Install new differential side oil seal into transaxle housing as H
specified using Tool.
Tool number : ST33400001 (J-26082)
I
Distance : 14.8 - 15.8 mm (0.583 - 0.622 in)
NOTE:
● Do not reuse differential side oil seal. J
● Apply ATF to differential side oil seal.

SCIA5372E K

SCIA4474E

26. Install new thrust roller bearing in transaxle housing using Tool.
Tool number :ST30720000 (J-25405)
NOTE:
Do not reuse thrust roller bearing.

SCIA5373E

Revision: August 2004 AT-301 2005 Maxima

 ASSEMBLY

27. Install oil cleaner magnets on oil reservoir plate.

SCIA4167E

28. Install oil reservoir plate in transaxle housing.

29. Tighten oil reservoir plate bolts to specified torque. Refer to AT-
245, "Components" .

SCIA4166E

30. Install differential gear lube apply tube using a soft hammer.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to bend or damage differential gear lube
apply tube.

SCIA4272E

31. Tighten tube clamp bolt to specified torque. Refer to AT-245,

"Components" .

SCIA4164E

32. Install new governor apply gasket.

NOTE:
● Do not reuse governor apply gasket.

● Apply petroleum jelly to governor apply gasket.

33. Install new seal ring.

NOTE:
● Do not reuse seal ring.

● Apply ATF to seal ring.

SCIA4163E

Revision: August 2004 AT-302 2005 Maxima

 ASSEMBLY

34. Apply silicone RTV to transaxle housing as shown. Refer to GI-

43, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" . A
CAUTION:
Complete remove all moisture, oil and sealant, etc. From
transaxle housing and transaxle case. B

AT

SCIA4273E
D
35. Install transaxle housing in transaxle case.

G
SCIA4160E

36. Tighten transaxle housing bolts to specified torque. Refer to AT- H

245, "Components" .
NOTE:
Do not reuse seal bolt. I
Bolt symbol Length mm (in) Number of bolts
A 30 (1.18) 13
J
B 35 (1.38) 2
C 45 (1.77) 1
D* — 1 SCIA5495E K
*:Torx bolt
37. Install new oil seal into oil pump assembly until it is flush with oil
pump face using Tool. L
Tool number : ST30720000 (J-25405)
NOTE: M
● Do not reuse oil seal.

● Apply ATF to oil seal.

SCIA5364E

Revision: August 2004 AT-303 2005 Maxima

 ASSEMBLY

38. Install thrust washer and one- way clutch outer race sub assem-
bly in oil pump assembly.
NOTE:
Apply petroleum jelly to thrust washer.

SCIA4274E

39. Check the distance of “B”.

“B” : 51.09 - 51.71 mm (2.0114 - 2.0358 in)
CAUTION:
If the distance is out of standards, adjust within standards
again.

SCIA4275E

40. Place oil pump assembly through the input shaft in horizontal
position, and align the bolt holes of the oil pump assembly with
transaxle case. Lightly press oil pump assembly.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to drop one-way clutch outer race sub
assembly.

SCIA4276E

41. Tighten oil pump assembly bolts to specified torque. Refer to AT-
245, "Components" .

SCIA4156E

SCIA4157E

Revision: August 2004 AT-304 2005 Maxima

 ASSEMBLY

42. Set a dial indicator as shown, move the input shaft and measure
the end play. A
End play : 0.188 - 0.570 mm (0.0074 - 0.00224 in)

AT

SCIA4277E

D
If end play is out of standards, select another thrust bearing race.
Refer to AT-315, "FORWARD AND DIRECT CLUTCH ASSEMBLY" .
E

G
WCIA0386E

43. Remove transaxle case cover. H

44. Apply silicone RTV to transaxle case cover as shown in illustra-
tion. Refer to GI-43, "Recommended Chemical Products and
Sealants" . I

SCIA5507E
K

45. Install transaxle case cover in transaxle case.

L

SCIA4197E

46. Tighten transaxle case cover bolts to specified torque. Refer to

AT-245, "Components" .
CAUTION:
Do not reuse seal bolts.
Bolt symbol Length mm (in) Number of bolts
A 30 (1.18) 8
B 45 (1.77) 2

SCIA4194E

Revision: August 2004 AT-305 2005 Maxima

 ASSEMBLY

Bolt symbol Length mm (in) Number of bolts

C 48 (1.89) 2
D* — 1
*:Stud bolt

WCIA0340E

47. Install new governor apply gasket.

NOTE:
● Do not reuse governor apply gaskets.

● Apply petroleum jelly to governor apply gaskets.

SCIA4154E

48. Install terminal cord assembly.

CAUTION:
● Be careful not to break the solenoid connector and A/T
fluid temperature sensor.
NOTE:
Apply ATF to O-ring.

SCIA4155E

49. While holding control valve assembly, connect the parking lock
rod sub assembly to manual valve lever sub assembly.
NOTE:
Shift position is “N”.

SCIA4153E

Revision: August 2004 AT-306 2005 Maxima

 ASSEMBLY

50. Tighten control valve assembly bolts to specified torque. Refer

to AT-245, "Components" . A
Bolt symbol Length mm (in) Number of bolts
A 55 (2.17) 2
B
B 50 (1.97) 2
C 16 (0.63) 2
AT

SCIA4152E

D
51. Install suction cover and new suction cover gasket in control
valve assembly.
NOTE: E
Do not reuse suction cover gasket.

G
SCIA4149E

52. Tighten new suction cover gasket and suction cover bolts to H
specified torque. Refer to AT-245, "Components" .

SCIA4150E K

53. Install sensor clamp and A/T fluid temperature sensor in control
valve assembly. L

SCIA4147E

54. Tighten sensor clamp bolts to specified torque. Refer to AT-245,

"Components" .

SCIA4148E

Revision: August 2004 AT-307 2005 Maxima

 ASSEMBLY

55. Connect the solenoid connectors.

SCIA4146E

56. Apply silicone RTV to side cover as shown. Refer to GI-43,

"Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" .
CAUTION:
Complete remove all moisture, oil and sealant, etc. From
side cover and transaxle case.

SCIA5508E

57. Install side cover in transaxle case.

SCIA4143E

58. Tighten side cover torx bolts to specified torque. Refer to AT-
245, "Components" .
NOTE:
Do not reuse seal bolt.

SCIA4144E

Revision: August 2004 AT-308 2005 Maxima

 ASSEMBLY

59. Install new O-rings in ATF cooler assembly.

NOTE: A
● Do not reuse O-rings.

● Apply ATF to O-rings.

B
60. Install ATF cooler assembly, washer and new spring washer.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse spring washer.
AT
61. Tighten hexagon bolt specified torque. Refer to AT-245, "Com-
ponents" .
SCIA4142E
D
62. Install PNP switch to manual valve lever sub assembly.
63. Temporary tightening the bolts.
E
Bolt symbol Length mm (in) Number of bolts
A 20 (0.79) 1
B 33 (1.30) 1 F

G
SCIA4141E

64. Install washer plate and lock washer. H

NOTE:
Do not reuse washer plate and lock washer.
65. Tighten nut specified torque. Refer to AT-245, "Components" . I

SCIA4140E K

66. Install Tool.

Tool number : — (J45404) L

67. Adjust PNP switch so that Tool pointer aligns with neutral base
line on PNP switch body.
M

SCIA5374E

68. Tighten PNP switch bolts to specified torque. Refer to AT-245,

"Components" .

SCIA4434E

Revision: August 2004 AT-309 2005 Maxima

 ASSEMBLY

69. Bend the lock washer using a flat-bladed screwdriver.

SCIA4139E

70. Install range lever in manual valve lever sub assembly.

71. Tighten range lever nut to specified torque. Refer to AT-245,
"Components" .

SCIA4138E

72. Install turbine revolution sensor in transaxle case.

73. Tighten turbine revolution sensor bolt to specified torque. Refer
to AT-245, "Components" .
NOTE:
● Do not reuse seal bolt.

● Apply ATF to O-ring.

SCIA4137E

74. Install revolution sensor in transaxle case.

75. Tighten revolution sensor bolt to specified torque. Refer to AT-
245, "Components" .
NOTE:
● Do not reuse seal bolt.

● Apply ATF to O-ring.

SCIA4136E

76. Install new O-ring in A/T fluid charging pipe.

NOTE:
● Do not reuse O-ring.

● Apply petroleum jelly to O-ring.

77. Install A/T fluid charging pipe in transaxle housing.

78. Install A/T fluid cooler tube.
NOTE:
Do not reuse copper washer.
79. Tighten A/T fluid cooler tube union to specified torque. Refer to
AT-245, "Components" . SCIA4135E

Revision: August 2004 AT-310 2005 Maxima

 ASSEMBLY

80. Install air breather hose.

81. Install A/T fluid level gauge. A

82. Install drain plug in transaxle housing.

83. Tighten drain plug to specified torque. Refer to AT-245, "Components" . B
NOTE:
Do not reuse drain plug gasket.
84. Install torque converter. AT

SCIA4134E F

85. Check the dimension of “C”.

Dimension “C” : 14.0 mm (0.55 in) G
CAUTION:
If the distance is out of standards, adjust within standards
again. H

SAT044A

Revision: August 2004 AT-311 2005 Maxima

 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) PFP:00030

General Specifications ECS00BUG

Engine VQ35DE
Automatic transaxle model RE5F22A
Automatic transaxle model code number 9J500 8Y100
Stall torque ratio 1.8: 1
1st 4.657
2nd 3.032
3rd 1.982
Transaxle gear ratio 4th 1.341
5th 1.018
Reverse 5.114
Final drive 2.269 2,440
Recommended fluid Genuine Nissan Matic Fluid K*

Fluid capacity (US qt, Imp qt) 7.3 (7-3/4, 6-3/8)

CAUTION:
● Use only Genuine Nissan Matic Fluid K. Do not mix with other fluid.

● Using automatic transaxle fluid other than Genuine Nissan Matic Fluid K will deteriorate in driveability and automatic tran-
saxle durability, and may damage the automatic transaxle, which is not covered by the warranty.
*: Refer to MA-10, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" .

Shift Schedule ECS00BUH

VEHICLE SPEED WHEN SHIFTING GEARS

Vehicle speed km/h (MPH) (Approx.)
Accelerator angle
D1 →D2 D2 →D3 D3 →D4 D4 →D5 D5 →D4 D4 →D3 D3 →D2 D2 →D1
59 95 147 217 207 142 83 41
100 %
(37) (59) (91) (135) (129) (88) (52) (25)
59 95 147 217 207 142 83 41
90 %
(37) (59) (91) (135) (129) (88) (52) (25)
59 95 147 217 207 142 83 41
80 %
(37) (59) (91) (135) (129) (88) (52) (25)
59 95 147 217 197 141 81 41
70 %
(37) (59) (91) (135) (122) (88) (50) (25)
59 95 147 217 190 135 76 41
60 %
(37) (59) (91) (135) (118) (84) (47) (25)
59 90 137 202 176 123 69 41
50 %
(37) (56) (85) (126) (109) (76) (43) (25)
50 82 117 172 148 92 54 32
40 %
(31) (51) (73) (107) (92) (57) (34) (20)
37 62 87 127 105 59 35 19
30 %
(23) (39) (54) (79) (65) (37) (22) (12)
27 44 59 87 60 40 22 8
20 %
(17) (27) (37) (54) (37) (25) (14) (5)
19 27 35 55 44 32 22 8
10 %
(12) (17) (22) (34) (27) (20) (14) (5)

Revision: August 2004 AT-312 2005 Maxima

 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

VEHICLE SPEED WHEN PERFORMING AND RELEASING COMPLETE LOCK-UP

Vehicle speed km/h (MPH) (Approx.)
A
Accelerator angle
Lock-up “ON” Lock-up “OFF”
50 % 217 (135) 195 (121) B
15% 108 (67) 70 (43)
0-8% 66 (41) 63 (39)
● Lock-up vehicle speed indicates the speed in D position. AT
● Perform lock-up inspection after warming up engine.
● Lock-up vehicle speed may vary depending on the driving conditions and circumstances.
D
VEHICLE SPEED WHEN PERFORMING AND RELEASING SLIP LOCK-UP
Vehicle speed km/h (MPH) (Approx.)
Accelerator angle Gear position
Slip lock-up “ON” Slip lock-up “OFF” E
4th 41 (25) 38 (24)
0 - 10 %
5th 53 (33) 50 (31)
F
● Slip lock-up vehicle speed indicates the speed in D position.
● Perform slip lock-up inspection after warming up engine.
● Slip lock-up vehicle speed may vary depending on the driving conditions and circumstances. G
Stall Speed ECS00BUI

Stall speed 2,430 - 2,730 rpm H

Line Pressure ECS00BUJ

Line pressure kPa (kg/cm2 , psi) I

Engine speed
D, M positions R position
At idle speed 333 - 392 (3.4 - 4.0, 48 - 57) 500 - 608 (5.1 - 6.2, 73 - 88)
J
At stall speed 1,285 - 1,393 (13.1 - 14.2, 186 - 202) 1,706 - 1,981 (17.4 - 20.2, 247 - 287)

Time Lag ECS00BUK

K
Selector lever Time
N to D position Less than 0.7 sec.
N to R position Less than 1.2 sec. L

Shift Solenoid Valves ECS00BUL

Shift solenoid valve M

Shift position Remarks
A B C D E
P OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) OFF (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) PARK POSITION
R OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) ON (Open) OFF (Open) ON (Open) REVERSE POSITION
N OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) OFF (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) NEUTRAL POSITION
1st ON (Closed) ON (Open) ON (Open) OFF (Open) OFF (Closed)
1⇔2 OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) ON (Open) OFF (Open) OFF (Closed)
2nd OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) ON (Open) OFF (Open) OFF (Closed)
2⇔3 OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) ON (Open) ON (Closed) ON (Open)
Automatic shift
D 3rd OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) ON (Open) ON (Closed) OFF (Closed)
1⇔2⇔3⇔4⇔5
3⇔4 OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) OFF (Closed) ON (Closed) ON (Open)
4th OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) OFF (Closed) ON (Closed) OFF (Closed)
4⇔5 OFF (Open) ON (Open) OFF (Closed) ON (Closed) OFF (Closed)
5th OFF (Open) ON (Open) OFF (Closed) ON (Closed) OFF (Closed)

Revision: August 2004 AT-313 2005 Maxima

 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

Shift solenoid valve

Shift position Remarks
A B C D E
M5 5th OFF (Open) ON (Open) OFF (Closed) ON (Closed) OFF (Closed) Locks in 5th gear*
M4 4th OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) OFF (Closed) ON (Closed) OFF (Closed) Locks in 4th gear*
M3 3rd OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) ON (Open) ON (Closed) OFF (Closed) Locks in 3rd gear*
M2 2nd OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) ON (Open) OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) Locks in 2nd gear*
M1 1st ON (Closed) ON (Open) ON (Open) OFF (Open) ON (Open) Locks in 1st gear*
*: Except when automated up/down shift control and up/down shift permission control are actuated. Refer to AT-37, "MANUAL MODE" .

Solenoid Valves ECS00BUM

Solenoid valves Resistance (Approx.) Connector (Color) Terminal

Shift solenoid valve A (B) 1 - Ground
Shift solenoid valve B (GR) 1 - Ground
Shift solenoid valve C 11 - 16 Ω (GR) 1 - Ground
Shift solenoid valve D (L) 1 - Ground
Shift solenoid valve E (G) 1 - Ground
Pressure control solenoid valve A (G) 1-2
Pressure control solenoid valve B 5.0 - 5.6 Ω (B) 1-2
Pressure control solenoid valve C (L) 1-2
Specified resistance at 20°C (68°F).

Clutch and Brakes ECS00BUN

2ND BRAKE
Number of 2nd brake plates 4
Number of 2nd brake discs 4
Number of 2nd brake flange 1
Piston stroke mm (in) 1.10 - 1.50 (0.0433 - 0.0591)
Thickness mm (in) Part number*

Thickness of 2nd brake flanges 3.6 (0.142) 31537-8Y011

3.8 (0.150) 31537-8Y012
4.0 (0.157) 31537-8Y013
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.

2ND COAST BRAKE

Number of 2nd coast brake plates 3
Number of 2nd coast brake discs 3
Number of 2nd coast brake flange 1
Piston stroke mm (in) 0.76 - 1.44 (0.0299 - 0.0567)

Revision: August 2004 AT-314 2005 Maxima

 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

B5 BRAKE
Number of B5 brake plates 6
A

Number of B5 brake discs 6

Number of B5 brake flange 1 B
Number of B5 brake cushion plate 1
Piston stroke mm (in) 2.34 - 2.70 (0.0921 - 0.1063)
Thickness mm (in) Part number* AT
5.0 (0.197) 31667-8Y010
Thickness of B5 brake flanges 5.1 (0.202) 31667-8Y015
5.2 (0.205) 31667-8Y011 D
5.3 (0.209) 31667-8Y013
5.5 (0.217) 31667-8Y014
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. E
1ST AND REVERSE BRAKE
Number of 1st and reverse brake plates 4
F
Number of 1st and reverse brake discs 5
Number of 1st and reverse brake flanges 2
Piston stroke mm (in) 1.39 - 2.21 (0.0547 - 0.0870) G
FORWARD AND DIRECT CLUTCH ASSEMBLY
Thickness mm (in) Part number*
H
Thickness of thrust washer races 0.81 (0.0319) 31435 8Y011
1.15 (0.0453) 31435 8Y012
End play mm (in) 0.305 - 0.820 mm (0.0120 - 0.0323) I
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.

U/D BRAKE
J
Piston type Mark Piston length mm (in) Part number*
A — 63.7 (2.508) 31615 8Y005
B 1 64.2 (2.528) 31615 8Y004 K
C 2 64.7 (2.547) 31615 8Y003
D 3 65.2 (2.567) 31615 8Y002
L
E 4 65.7 (2.587) 31615 8Y001
Piston stroke mm (in) 5.76 - 6.76 mm (0.2268 - 0.2661)
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. M
Final Drive ECS00BUO

DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARING ADJUSTING SHIMS

Thickness mm (in) Part number* Thickness mm (in) Part number*
1.00 (0.0394) 31438-8Y001 1.48 (0.0583) 31438-8Y013
1.05 (0.0413) 31438-8Y002 1.51 (0.0594) 31438-8Y014
1.10 (0.0433) 31438-8Y003 1.54 (0.0606) 31438-8Y015
1.15 (0.0453) 31438-8Y004 1.57 (0.0618) 31438-8Y016
1.20 (0.0472) 31438-8Y005 1.60 (0.0630) 31438-8Y017
1.25 (0.0492) 31438-8Y006 1.65 (0.0650) 31438-8Y018
1.30 (0.0512) 31438-8Y007 1.70 (0.0669) 31438-8Y019
1.33 (0.0524) 31438-8Y008 1.75 (0.0689) 31438-8Y020
1.36 (0.0535) 31438-8Y009 1.80 (0.0709) 31438-8Y021
1.39 (0.0547) 31438-8Y010 1.85 (0.0728) 31438-8Y022
1.42 (0.0559) 31438-8Y011 1.90 (0.0748) 31438-8Y023
1.45 (0.0571) 31438-8Y012
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.

Revision: August 2004 AT-315 2005 Maxima

 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

TURNING TORQUE
Turning torque of final drive assembly 0.7 - 1.2 N·m (0.08 - 0.12kg-m, 7 - 10 in-lb)

A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor ECS00BUP

Condition Voltage (Approx.) Resistance (Approx.)

0°C (32°F) 4.0V 9.8 kΩ
20°C (68°F) 3.0V 4.2 kΩ
ATF temperature
80°C (176°F) 0.8V 0.54 kΩ
100°C (212°F) 0.5V 0.31 kΩ

Turbine Revolution Sensor ECS00BUQ

Condition Signal Voltage* (Approx.)

HIGH 1.2 - 1.6V
Connect 12V power supply and 100 Ω resistance, and then shake magnetic body.
LOW 0.4 - 0.8V
*: Voltage with both end of 100 Ω resistance.

Revolution Sensor ECS00BUR

Condition Signal Voltage* (Approx.)

HIGH 1.2 - 1.6V
Connect 12V power supply and 100 Ω resistance, and then shake magnetic body.
LOW 0.4 - 0.8V
*: Voltage with both end of 100 Ω resistance.

Revision: August 2004 AT-316 2005 Maxima